JP7240761B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

When a lottery for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is held when a predetermined starting condition is met, the gaming machine changes the decorative symbols on the display means to display the judgment result (for example, patent Reference 1).

JP 2008-246019 A

By the way, in a gaming machine, an effect may be executed while displaying a decorative pattern on a predetermined display means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to improve interest in production using decorative patterns.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes main control means (for example, game control section 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means for controlling game production based on commands from the main control means. (e.g., production control unit 300), and an image display means (e.g., first image display device 70) that updates a display image each time a predetermined frame update timing is provided, and the main Based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the starting condition, the control means includes a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) that determines whether or not to perform a special game, and the determination that the determination has not been performed. A storage means (for example, RAM 203) capable of storing information as a reserved storage, and a game control that can be controlled in a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state) means (e.g., game control unit 200), and variation control means for variably displaying symbols based on the result of the determination and then stop-displaying them, and the effect control means is provided according to the number of the pending memories. number of icons (for example, the pending icon in FIG. 109(b)) can be displayed, and the icon is a special mode suggesting the possibility that the special game different from the normal mode (for example, the CD icon) will be executed. (For example, a blue character icon, a red character icon, a rainbow character icon) can be executed a change effect (for example, an icon change effect), and in the change effect, the start condition is satisfied and the determination information is displayed. A first change effect (for example, a winning change effect) executed at a frame update timing according to the reception of a command (for example, a start winning designation command) transmitted from the main control means based on the acquisition; A second change effect (for example, normal There are a change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a pattern action change pattern 01), and it is possible to execute a variable effect of changing and displaying a plurality of patterns on the display means, and among the plurality of patterns. (for example, the left and right decorative patterns 41) are displayed, and the remaining patterns (for example, the middle decorative pattern 41) can be executed to continue the fluctuation. A specific identification element (for example, 36 (B-5) number element 411) can be enlarged, and when performing the reach effect, the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (A-1) to (A-4), 36 (A-5) to (A-8), and low probability time-saving non-gaming state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. mode (for example, the decorative patterns 41 of FIGS. 35 (B-1) to (B-4), FIGS. 36 (B-5) to (B-8), and FIGS. 37 (B-9) to (B-12) High-probability time-saving gaming state in which the variable display is performed) is easier to enlarge and display the specific identification element after the start of the reach production, and the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (A-1) to (A- 4), FIG. 36 (A-5) to (A-8), and FIG. 37 (A-9) to (A-11) in the low probability time-saving non-game state) in which the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 is performed) When performing a ready-to-win effect, it is possible to enlarge and display the specific identification element (for example, the numerical element 411 in FIG. 52(2)) after the start of the ready-to-win effect, and when increasing and displaying the icon, a predetermined (for example, the generated notification sound of FIG. 109(b)) can be output, and when the icon is increased by one and displayed during the customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed, the increased display period of the icon ( For example, when the output period of the predetermined notification sound (for example, the period of T1 to T3 in FIG. 108) is longer than the period of T1 to T2 in FIG. 108, and the first change effect is executed. , the output of the predetermined notification sound is started at the timing when the first change effect is started, and the output of the predetermined notification sound is finished at a timing different from the timing when the first change effect is finished. and

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given for illustrative purposes when describing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve interest in production using decorative patterns.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows operation|movement of the basic process by a game control part. It is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a starting opening switch process. 4 is a flowchart showing the details of gate switch processing; It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flow chart showing the contents of normal design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of the random number used in the present embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot pattern random number, (c ) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a winning random number. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a) is. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the effect control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a reserved storage area, (b) is a block showing the configuration of each of the storage unit shown in (a) It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination process. It is a flow chart which shows operation of a production control part, (a) is a figure showing main processing, and (b) is a figure showing interruption processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing; 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 26. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 26; FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of a customer waiting command reception process of FIG. 26; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production|presentation button processing. It is a variation performance pattern table for big hits in a low probability time saving non-playing state. A variable effect pattern table for small hits and losses in a low probability time saving non-game state is shown. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is the figure which showed the modification of the character design enlargement display production|presentation. It is the figure which showed the modified example of the ready-to-win period design production. It is the figure which showed the modified example of the ready-to-win period design production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of a mode in which a highly decorative decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that is cut off from the display area of the image display section; It is the figure which showed the modification of the display mode of a 4th pattern. It is the figure which showed the modification of the variation production example of A mode as production mode in a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one mode of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-stage change pattern determination table for the said icon. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect generation timing. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the occurrence frequency of the change effect type and the change effect generation timing, and (d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the change production|presentation at the time of winning. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01; 1 is a timing chart 1 of a character effect change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of character effect change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the character action change pattern 01; FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 106; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 109; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 118 is a continuation of FIG. 118;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[First embodiment]
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins. This pachinko game machine 100 comprises a game board 110 on which game balls are launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110.例文帳に追加The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150 .

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 forming a passage for the game balls shot from below to rise to an upper position of the game area 111, and a game board 110. A guide member 113 for guiding game balls is provided on the right side of the area 111 .
In the present embodiment, an image display section 114 for displaying various images for presentation is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative symbols for informing the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol fluctuation result) as the player progresses the game, An effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using a hold display, which will be described later, is displayed.
In addition, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided on the front surface of the game board 110 . The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

The game area 111 is provided with game pegs, windmills and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Also, in the game area 111, various accessories related to prize winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 for discharging out of the game area 111 those game balls that have hit the game area 111 but have not entered the winning opening.

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, when a game ball wins, a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) starts 121 and 2nd start port 122, and when a game ball passes through, normal A starting gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is arranged on the game board 110 . In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, respectively, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to herein refer to a prize winning port that triggers the operation of one predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 are provided with switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of game balls at the time of winning. It is When the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 is provided with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory, in which a pair of tulip-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and lighted. In the electric tulip 123, when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 122, but when the blades are opened, the entrance of the second start port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the normal pattern lottery, the wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 time to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

A pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a low-probability state with a low winning probability and a high-probability state with a higher winning probability than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of a jackpot lottery. Then, the state is controlled to either the low probability state or the high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has two game states: an electric sapo state in which there are few chances of winning the second starting port 122, and an electric sapo state in which there are more chances to win a prize in the second starting port 122 than in the no electric sapo state. have. Then, for example, under a predetermined condition such as triggered by the number of lotteries of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, it is controlled to be in either the state of no power supply or the power supply state. The electric sapo state is, for example, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a game state controlled by combination.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a time-saving no state with a long special symbol variation time and a time-saving state with a shorter special symbol variation time than the no time-saving state.
In addition, in this Embodiment, an electric support state and a time saving state shall be controlled simultaneously. Further, in the following description, the electric sapo state and time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric sapo no state and no time saving state are simply referred to as no time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, there is a large winning opening 125 as a special electric accessory that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and a lottery is performed even if the game ball wins. A normal prize winning port 126 is provided on the game board 110.例文帳に追加A special winning opening door 125</b>D for opening and closing the special winning opening 125 is provided in the special winning opening 125 . In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening door 125D may be referred to as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 125 for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery results and the number of pending games is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110 .

In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, there are a game control board for determining the winning of special symbols, etc., an effect control board for comprehensively controlling effects, an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, various lamps and Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the performance by the movable accessory 115 are attached. A switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs the DC power to various substrates is arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110 .

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, the frame member 150 shoots game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle. Equipped with a launcher (not shown) that fires electrically. In addition, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the shooting device one by one at a timing interlocked with the operation of the lever 152 by the player, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the shooting device. and a plate 153 for temporarily storing. To this plate 153, balls to be paid out by a payout unit are put out, for example.
In this embodiment, the plate 153 is integrated with the upper and lower plates. A configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

The frame member 150 also includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the shooting of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the shooting device, and a game ball accumulated in the tray 153. and an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
The frame member 150 also includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for announcing the game state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various productions using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a luminous body such as an LED, and performs various effects with light, such as a pattern of lighting and blinking, a difference in emission color, and the like. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example is conceivable in which it is possible to perform an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light.
The frame member 150 also has a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of the display 130 arranged at the lower left of the game board 110. FIG. 2(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100. FIG.
The indicator 130 of the pachinko game machine 100, as shown in FIG. A second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. The first special symbol display device 221 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting port 121, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The second special symbol display device 222 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the second starting port 122, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The normal symbol display device 223 variably displays the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the display device 130 is a first special symbol reservation display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the first special symbol display device 221, and a second special symbol display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the second special symbol display device 222. A 2 special design reservation display 219 and a normal design reservation display 220 which operates corresponding to the reservation by the normal design display 223 are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219 and the normal symbol reservation display device 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is determined by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be explained. When the game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbols (while the variable display for one prize is being performed), the special symbols are changing. Secondly, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbols based on the subsequent prize winning. Therefore, subsequent winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbols for the winning game ball is not retained until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. Reserved.
It should be noted that the same processing as that for the special symbols is performed for the normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special design reservation display 219 and the normal design reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the indicator 130 has a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights to notify whether the state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. In addition, the other one is for notifying by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving state with a short special symbol variation time. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the indicator 130 has a round number indicator 225 for displaying the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is activated in the big winning game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Incidentally, the jackpot game will be described later. The round number indicator 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operation rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an input device for the player to make an input for the performance. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production button 161, a production key 162 adjacent to the production button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, are arranged on the frame member 150 . In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect for accepting an operation of selecting one image from among a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates a production key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross to designate one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114 and press the production button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting the instructed image. As for the form of the input device, in addition to the production button 161 and production key 162 shown in the drawings, various input forms such as levers and handles can be adopted according to the contents of production.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control section and a lamp control section according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes, as main control means, a game control section 200 for determining whether a special symbol is won or the like. In addition, as a sub-control means, it is provided with an effect control unit 300 that controls the effect in general, and a payout control unit 330 that performs payout control of the payout balls.

[Structure and function of the game control unit]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining winning of special symbols, etc., a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a working memory for the CPU 201. and a RAM 203 .

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high probability state or a low probability state, or in either a no time saving state or a time saving state. As a result, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a high probability state and time saving state high probability time saving game state, a low probability state and time saving state low probability time saving game state, a high probability state and no time saving state high It becomes one of the low probability time saving non-gaming state, the low probability state and the low probability time saving non-gaming state which is the non-working time saving state. And the game control part 200 switches a high probability state and a low probability state based on a predetermined|prescribed condition, and switches a time saving no state and a time saving state. In addition, the game control unit 200, in the time saving state, controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 . Then, a special game such as a jackpot game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 performs a predetermined number of rounds to maintain an open state until the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). control to repeat only Then, the game control section 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 is opened.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 is controlled by the suspension caused by the game ball entering the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the special symbol variation, and the game ball passing through the gate 124 during the normal symbol variation. Set the hold that occurs due to
In addition, the game control unit 200, the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery, the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, the change information of the time saving no state and the time saving state, the setting information of the reservation, etc. accompanying the game control Information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command to be described later.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200, when the game ball wins the first start port 121, the second start port 122, the large winning prize port 125 and the normal winning prize port 126, one game ball hits according to the place where the game ball wins. The payout controller 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121, three prize balls are awarded, when a game ball enters the second start port 122, four prize balls are awarded, and when a game ball enters the big prize winning port 125, thirteen prizes are awarded. When a game ball wins a ball or a normal winning hole 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to a payout control unit 330 so as to pay out 10 prize balls respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls associated therewith.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200 , the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330 . Thereby, the number of awarded balls is managed.

The game control unit 200 includes, as detection means, a first start opening detection unit (first start opening switch (SW)) 211 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first start opening 121, as shown in FIG. , a second starting opening detection unit (second starting opening switch (SW)) 212 that detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 122, an electric tulip opening and closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate 124 A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. A large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216 that is set to a closed state and a protruding inclined open state, and a normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the winning of a game ball into the normal winning opening 126. , are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol holding display 218 that displays the unvaried pending number of winnings in the first start port 121 during the variation of the special symbols, and a second special symbol during the variation of the special symbols. A second special symbol reservation display 219 for displaying the unvaried reserved number of winning prizes in the starting port 122, and a normal symbol reservation display for displaying the unvaried reserved number passed through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuation. 220 and are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 for displaying the fluctuation display of the special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. A second special symbol display 222 for displaying the variable display of special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display for displaying the variable display of the normal symbols and the result of the normal symbol lottery. A device 223 and a state display device 224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Detection signals detected by the first start switch 211 , the second start switch 212 , the gate switch 214 , the big win switch 215 and the normal win switch 217 are sent to the game controller 200 . In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 is the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, and the normal design reservation display device 220. , the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223 and the state indicator 224. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of awarded balls to be paid out.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected with a board external information terminal board 350 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information about the number of paid out prize balls and information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. and has.
Then, the payout control section 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control section 200 .
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game control unit 200 according to the location (first start port 121, etc.) where the game ball has won. Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is configured by a drive motor for sending out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 for detecting the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball storage unit (not shown). A ball presence detection unit 336 for detecting whether or not the balls are stored, and a tray 153 for holding game balls used when a player plays a game and paid-out prize balls are in a full tank state. The full-tank detector 337 is connected. The payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected with a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various kinds of information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 provides, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340 . In addition, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, and a date and time and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the
The effect control unit 300 sets the content of the effect based on the result of determination as to whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not sent from the game control unit 200 and the variation pattern, for example. At that time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162 may be received, and the effect contents corresponding to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the production button 161, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the setting of production.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs setting of a screen display for customer waiting as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 sets the content of effect based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state and the change information of the no time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200 .
In addition, effect control section 300 sends a command instructing execution of the set effect content to image/sound control section 310 and lamp control section 320 .
In addition, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the initial screen when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on. Although the details will be described later, the initial screen is an initial screen that is displayed when the power is turned on. is included.

Further, the production control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls production using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls production using various lamps and movable accessories 115. It is

[Structure and function of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the image and sound representing the content of the effect, and a program that is executed by the CPU 311, various data, and the like. A ROM 312 , a RAM 313 used as a work memory for the CPU 311 , a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314 , a CGROM 315 , and an SNDROM 316 are provided.

The image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300 .
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores pattern images and background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decorative patterns for notifying the player of the lottery result, characters and characters for displaying the advance notice effect to the player. Image data such as items are stored. The SNDROM 316 also stores various audio data such as music, voice, and effect sounds such as jingles to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
CPU311, based on the pending number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300, analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes commands related to drawing, and transmits the display list to the VDP314. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 uses the read image data to perform background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, drawing processing for character/item display, etc., and audio processing using the read sound data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the rendered image data. Also, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound-processed sound data.
In this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but this is not a limitation, and a processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided separately.

[Structure and function of lamp controller]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and the programs and various data that are executed by the CPU 321. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a work memory for the CPU 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, etc., based on the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Also, it controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 .

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 corresponding to the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 300 . The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each provided on the rear surface of the game board 110. A game control board as a sub-board, an effect control board as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board are individually configured.
In addition, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320 .

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , and a normal symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that perform operation control of various accessories and data processing related to prize balls. , an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball has won the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, for each type of random number, a numerical value within a predetermined range One numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234 . Although details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variation pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In addition, in the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ) is done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232 . In addition, as the random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random number indicating whether or not winning, the symbol random number indicating the type of winning, the variation pattern random number, etc. may be set.
The special symbol variation control section 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 according to the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. type”, and “whether it is a small win or not when the big win is not won”. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game, etc.) advantageous to the player based on the obtained random number value. It should be noted that the aforementioned lottery for the special symbol (big hit lottery) refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234 .

Here, the "jackpot" is classified into a plurality of types according to the game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by a combination of no time-saving state or time-saving state, and a high-probability state or a low-probability state. That is, as the type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game, a jackpot that becomes a high probability time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability time saving game state jackpot), a low probability time saving game state A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot), a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot), a low probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, low There can be a jackpot in a probability time-saving non-playing state). These jackpots are associated with individual special symbols, respectively, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbols won in the special symbol lottery.

Also, the "jackpot" may be divided into a big win in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot game in which the jackpot game time is short and almost no game balls can be expected to be paid out. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in the "long win", a round is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) until the open state of the big prize opening 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have won a prize). be In addition, in the "short hit", a round in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, the "small win" when the big win is not won is a small win game in which the big winning port 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). done. When the small prize is won, the game state before winning the small prize is continued even after the small prize is finished. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state is continued even after the small win game ends, and the game state does not shift. Similarly, when the game state at the time of winning the small win is the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the low-probability time-saving no-game state is continued even after the small-win game ends, and the game state does not shift.
In addition, "minor win" is a kind of "lose", and none of the above game states that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection section 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 . Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 is a variation pattern (for example, 13.5 seconds or more ), the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "ready-to-win" is an effect for making the player expect a big win in decorative symbols, which will be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol is "whether or not" using a random number table as shown in FIG. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines, based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231, whether or not the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 is to be performed. Also, when a plurality of types of wins are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a win. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232 .
The normal symbol variation control section 236 controls the normal symbol variation by the normal symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 only for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines “hit” in the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. A state in which it is easy to win a prize is generated. Further, when it is determined that the tulip is "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the big winning as a big winning game. 125 to control the opening operation. In addition, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "small hit" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the big winning opening 125 for a specified time and specified number of times as a small winning game. .
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes awarded to various accessories related to prizes and lotteries, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 and the payout control section 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 performs initialization and initial setting of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing relating to the progress of the game. Moreover, when shutting off the power, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power shut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is described as "S") 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power shutdown is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether the checksum created at the time of power shutdown is normal (S604).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), then the game control unit 200 executes return processing (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the power is shut off (whether the jackpot game is in progress, either the high probability state or the low probability state, the time saving state and the time saving no state). (either) is output to the effect control unit 300 to set the sub-control means so as to reflect. Also, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes at S602), the backup flag is OFF (No at S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No at S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As processing, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S608). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) ends, or after the setting of the sub board (see S608) ends, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 allows interrupts (S610), disables interrupts (S611), designs random number control processing (S612), initial value random number update processing (S613), and determines whether or not the power shutdown flag is ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S610) and interrupt prohibition (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variation pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is not cut off, the game control unit 200, loop processing (S610 ~ S614) and main control by interrupt Execute the process repeatedly. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff processing).

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of game machine]
Next, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the effect, and issues a prize ball to the payout control unit 330. to control the payout of

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the main control process of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in the game control, and is repeatedly executed every preset constant time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S610) in the loop processing shown in FIG. 6, the main control as the interrupt processing Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric accessory process, a winning ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. The details of setting the random number and updating the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a starting port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the starting port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the states of the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212 in FIG. When it becomes, the processing for the special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the preliminary determination process is performed in the first start opening switch 211 and the second start opening switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called, Execute processing for prior determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute the process.
Details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing accompanying this symbol variation. do.
In the normal design process, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal design determination section 232 and the normal design fluctuation control section 236, and executes the normal design fluctuation and the process associated with this design fluctuation.
Detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), the big winning opening processing and the electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237, and controls the opening operation of the big winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123 which is a normal electric accessory based on predetermined conditions.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for controlling the number of prizes won and the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . The payout control command is generated in the process of S<b>805 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the control command storage areas of the RAM 203, and if control commands are stored in the individual storage areas (that is, control commands are generated in the processing of S802 to S805). ), the control command is read out and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each function as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203 . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the commands generated during the execution of the one cycle are output after the final command generation during the execution of the one cycle.

[Modification of Basic Operation of Gaming Machine]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as interrupt processing. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals, and specific implementation means (execution procedure) are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control process may be returned to at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into the series of operations of the basic process, as in the operations described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

When outputting a command generated by the basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands are output promptly so that there is no omission in the output processing. processing. In the case where commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and collectively output according to a request for specific processing. can be

[Random Number Update Processing by Game Control Unit]
A random number as determination information used for various lotteries in game control such as a special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 is performed. It is incremented by 1 each time. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting port switch process (Fig. 9) and the gate switch process (Fig. 10), and is used in the special design process (Fig. 11) and the normal design process (Fig. 16). be. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the set maximum random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20(a), which will be described later), , returns to the initial value again. In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular time intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the information on the update interval and the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting opening switch process in the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start opening switch process, a process for winning at the first start opening 121 and a process for winning at the second start opening 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned ON (S901). When the first starting port switch 211 is turned ON, next the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U1 in the winning prize of the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S902). . In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the first start port 121 ends.

On the other hand, when the pending number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). . Here, since the first starting port 121 wins a prize, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is obtained. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing. The random number here refers to the jackpot random number that determines the jackpot, small hit or loss, the type of jackpot (time saving state or no time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short Pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the hit), variation pattern random number value for specifying the variation pattern in the pattern variation, change pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach production described later when losing Reach random values that determine whether or not, etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S904). The pre-determining process is a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate, but random numbers have not yet been determined by the special symbol processing described later. This is processing for judging the random number before it is judged (pre-judgment).

And, production control section 300 of form of this execution, random number is decided by special design processing on the basis of the decision result of the random number which is decided by previous decision processing (preliminary decision result), than the decision result is notified A notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed before the game. This advance notice effect is, for example, in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate but random numbers have not yet been determined by special symbol processing, and the image display unit. This is performed using a pending display effect (described later) displayed in 114, or the like. The advance notice performance based on this advance determination suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that regarding the reserved ball corresponding to the advance judgment related to the notice performance. As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U1 (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the processing for winning in the first start port 121. .

Next, a process for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned ON (S908). When the second starting port switch 212 is turned ON, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number U2 in the winning prize of the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909 ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery based on the winning this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). . Here, since the second start port 122 wins a prize, the random number for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number, etc.) is acquired in the same manner as in the above S903. be. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S911). The content of this preliminary determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets the pending number increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the processing for winning in the second start port 122. .

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of the gate switch process when the game ball passes through the gate 124. As shown in FIG.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1001). If the gate switch 214 is turned ON, then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is four. If the pending number G has reached the upper limit value (No in S1002), the gate switch processing is terminated because the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for the lottery for this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since the gate 124 wins a prize, a random number (such as a winning random number) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number G of reservations (S1004).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets a number of reservations G increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G in S1004 in the RAM 203 (S1005), The processing for the winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol processing out of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already hitting the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), then the special symbol variation control section 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1102). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1102), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unvaried special symbols (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the reservation number U1 related to the winning of the first start opening 121 and the reservation number U2 related to the winning of the second start opening 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding start opening. .

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2=0 (No in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol variation control section 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1106). On the other hand, if the pending number U1=0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol variation is not started, and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. is executed to terminate the process (S1116).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing relating to the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is given priority. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, the process for the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when the number of reservations U2=0, the process for the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins, it is also possible to perform control such that the pending numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in order of winning.

After subtracting the number of reservations U1 or the number of reservations U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a big hit determination process and a variation pattern selection process by separate routines (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, this jackpot determination process and fluctuation pattern selection process set information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation patterns, etc.) are determined. In addition, these information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control unit 300 .

After that, the special symbol variation control section 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 shown in FIG. Start the variation of the special design to be (S1110). Then, a variation start command including setting information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The variation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating in S1102 (Yes in S1102), or after the fluctuation start command is set in S1111, the special symbol fluctuation control section 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbols in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has passed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the pattern decided by (S1113). A fluctuation stop command for stopping the decorative symbols, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, a process during stop of another routine is executed (S1115). The contents of the processing during suspension will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Jackpot determination processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number in the special symbol lottery of this time (S1201), and determines whether or not the jackpot or small hit is made (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a big win or a small win is made is whether or not the value of the big win random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. (See FIG. 20(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (high-probability time-saving gaming state jackpot, low-probability time-saving non-gaming state jackpot, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by whether the value of the jackpot pattern random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches with which of the values preset for each type of jackpot (FIG. b) see).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of the jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination of S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 is a symbol representing a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S1206).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (no time saving state or time saving state, and high probability state or low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the judgment result of S1202 of the big hit judging process (FIG. 12), it is judged whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has made a big hit (S1302). Then, if it is a big win (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads a variation pattern table for big wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1302), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called ready-to-win effect to make the player expect a big win. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (see FIG. 20(c)). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, if the reach effect is performed (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Also, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values is a table that associates

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the variation pattern random value obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 to determine the variation pattern random value (S1308 ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or no time saving state, and whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it was a big hit or not , whether or not the ready-to-win effect is to be performed when the jackpot is not achieved), etc. Since the variation pattern table referred to differs depending on the difference, the determined variation pattern differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 to the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1309 is included in the variation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the variation pattern selected in the present embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Stopping process by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the contents of the in-stop process (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating a time saving state in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) is ON (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (fluctuation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J has become 0. is examined (S1403). And if the lottery frequency J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1404). The operation to turn on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the big winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401) or after the time saving flag is turned OFF in S1404, or if the value of the lottery number J after subtracting in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then game control The unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high-probability state (hereinafter referred to as a high-probability flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). In addition, when both this high probability flag and the previous time saving flag are ON, it is in a high probability time saving gaming state, and when the high probability flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, it is in a high probability time saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) X in the high probability state (S1406), and whether the number of times of lottery X becomes 0 It is checked whether or not (S1407). Then, if the lottery number of times X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1408). The operation to turn on the high probability flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the big winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

If the high-precision flag is OFF (No in S1405) or after the high-precision flag is turned OFF in S1408, or if the value of the lottery number X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has won a big hit (S1409). Then, if it is a jackpot (Yes in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines the type of jackpot (S1410). In addition, here, as an example of determination of the kind of jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit.

Here, the judgment as to whether or not it is a big win can be made based on the judgment result of the big win judging process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20(b), which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1409. If the winning design or the small winning design is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, it is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a big win game state (long win game state) in which the kind of big win is a long win. It should be noted that here in the long hit, it does not distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. Whether the high-probability state or the low-probability state is established is specified by turning ON the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described large winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the type of jackpot is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a big winning gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the kind of big winning is a short winning. As in the case of long winning, there is no distinction between high probability state and low probability state in short winning.

After turning ON the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1413). Moreover, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high probability flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation (S1417). Here, the contents of the opening operation differ depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an opening operation effect corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the stop processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big win (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small win (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stop processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts a small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the small winning game state. In addition, in the small winning game, as described above, the big winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process is terminated (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command, sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is set in a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no reservation.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal design process among the design processes shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal design process, the normal design variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when winning the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 19) described later and it is easy to win the second start port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, it is already in the auxiliary game state and the normal design is stopped, so the normal design process is terminated without starting the normal design fluctuation (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), then the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol variation (S1602). If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1602), then the normal symbol fluctuation control section 236 determines whether or not the number G of reserved normal symbols (see FIG. 10) for the non-fluctuation is 1 or more (S1603). If the number of reservations G=0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no winning for starting the lottery of normal symbols, so the process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current normal symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (S1605). Whether or not the player has won the lottery is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in a table or the like shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal design variation control unit 236 normally sets the design according to the result of the normal design lottery (S1606). That is, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal design variation control section 236 sets the normal design variation time (S1607). This variable time is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and if the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control section 236 starts the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol display device 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). In addition, it is also possible to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 normally acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 normally obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol. The variable time is set by the determination.

After starting the variation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined that the symbol is normally varying in S1602 (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1609 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation in S1608 has reached the variation time set in S1607. If the variation time has not passed (No in S1609), the normal symbol variation is continued, so the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol variation control section 236 stops the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is winning (S1611). If it is elected (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is lost (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big winning opening process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big winning opening process, the big winning opening operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the big winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning to the big winning hole 125, so the big winning hole process is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 controls the opening operation control during the jackpot that is started in the pachinko gaming machine 100 stop processing (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not it is in the middle of an operation (S1702).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset opening operation time (opening time) has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the big winning opening 125 is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704), and initializes the number of winning prizes C (C=0). Then (S1705), 1 is added to the value of the number R of rounds for operation of the large winning opening 125 from the current value (S1706), and the operation of the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 125 and the number of rounds to be operated in the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. Examples of the case where the big winning opening 125 is activated include a case of a big win or a short win in a special symbol lottery, and a case of a small win. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the types of these wins. In addition, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the operation of the jackpot 125 is continuously performed a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and one opening of 29.5 seconds is performed in one round. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and one opening of 0.9 seconds is performed in one round. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, the door is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 seconds, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit are compared in the above example, both are opened twice for 0.9 seconds. In other words, the action of the big winning hole 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of a short win and the case of a small win. you can't.

In addition, it is stipulated by law that the accumulated opening time of the big winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds at the time of the small winning. On the other hand, in the case of a big win (long win or short win), the big winning opening 125 must be opened continuously a plurality of times. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish between the operation of the small hit and the operation of the short hit as described above, in the small hit, within the range where the open cumulative time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds, An operation mode is set in which the big winning opening 125 is opened two or more times, and in the short winning, the same number of rounds as the number of openings of the small winning is set.

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines that the winning number C of the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). pieces) or more (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the large winning prize port 125 is continued, so the large winning prize port processing is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or if the number of winning prizes C has reached the prescribed number (Yes in S1709), the large winning prize gate operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the big prize winning gate 125 (closes). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R for operating the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

If the number of rounds R for the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending action corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending actions set in each game of the long hitting game and the short hitting game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control section 237 sets an ending command to the RAM 203 for performing an effect in the ending operation corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control section 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, after resetting the number of rounds R for the operation of the big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the required time (ending time) has elapsed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 turns OFF the jackpot game flag after the game state setting process by the game control section 200 (S1718). The big winning opening process is terminated (S1719). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

In S1702, when it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes at S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending state (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). If not in operation (No in S1716), the operations from S1705 onward are executed, and if in operation (Yes in S1716), the operations from S1708 onward are executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, as a premise, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the big hit judging process (FIG. 12). In addition, since these determinations are substantially the same as S1202, S1203, and S1205 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state setting process is terminated because the game state is not changed.
If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving gaming state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802 and S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a low probability time-saving game state. Also, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving gaming state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, and No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after this big hit is a low probability time saving non-game state.

If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801 and S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807), and sets the initial value of the lottery number J. (S1808). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10000 in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag (S1809), and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10000 in the illustrated example. Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a high probability time-saving game state. Then, when the lottery in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is performed 10000 times, the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends, and the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, S1802, and S1806), the game control unit 200 turns ON only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the lottery number X (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the high probability time saving non-gaming state. Then, when the lottery in the high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control section 238 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, since the electric tulip 123 is not opened, the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S1904). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds open An operating pattern is set to open three times in time. Thus, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electric chew support) that makes it easier to win the second start port 122 is done. It should be noted that the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 in the case of the time saving flag is ON or OFF (type of auxiliary game) is prepared a plurality, normal design process (see FIG. 16) according to the type of hit determined by the operation It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines that the opening time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the open time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 continues to operate (open state), so the electric tulip process is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Method of judging by random numbers]
Here, the method of determination based on random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), normal symbol process (FIG. 16), etc. will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (decision table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
Fig. 20(a) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, Fig. 20(b) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, and Fig. 20(c) shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of reach random numbers used and a configuration example of hit random numbers used in normal symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20(d), respectively.

Referring to FIG. 20(a), as a determination value of the jackpot random number, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is a jackpot when the game state is a low probability state and the game state at the time of jackpot determination is a jackpot when the game state is a high probability state. 2 types and a small hit are set. The range of values of random numbers (random numbers for big hits) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In addition, in the case of the special symbol lottery in the high probability state, the winning value is set to 10, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery is performed by winning the start ports 121 and 122 in a high probability state, the probability of winning becomes ten times as compared with the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in a low probability state. In addition, the winning value of the small win is set to three regardless of whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, a special symbol lottery in a low-probability state will be described as an example. It is determined whether or not the winning value of the jackpot lottery in the low-probability state in (a) matches "5". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small hit.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent probability symbol. Here, the low-probability pattern A and the low-probability pattern B are patterns representing a low-probability state jackpot, among which the low-probability pattern A is a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot. indicates that there is The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state. The high-probability pattern A and the high-probability pattern B indicate a long hit (15 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate a long hit (8 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol E indicates that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot. The latent certainty pattern is a pattern representing a short hit (two rounds) and a high probability short time non-playing state jackpot. Therefore, the high-probability pattern B and the latent-probability pattern have the same game state after the jackpot game, but the latent-probability pattern is a condition for carrying out a latent performance that does not clearly notify the player of the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability pattern B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 that trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol A when winning the jackpot is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot is 15/250 (=3/50).

In the high-probability pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A is 20/250 (=2/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 150/250 (=15/25).

In the high-probability pattern B, five values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 25/250 (=1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B is 10/250 (=1/25) when the player wins the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability pattern D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability pattern E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 5/250 (=1/50).

In the latent probability pattern, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning the latent probability symbol in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 100/250 (=2/5).
On the other hand, the second starting port 122 is not assigned a winning value in the latent certainty pattern, and when the second starting port 122 wins, the winning in the latent certainty pattern does not occur.

Here, taking the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random number value (see S903 and S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. ), it is determined whether the winning value of the low-probability symbol A matches “0 to 34”. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery such as the low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by differentiating the winning probabilities of the types of jackpots in the case of winning the first starting hole 121 and the winning of the second starting hole 122, various game characteristics can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that either one of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 can be aimed easily in a specific state (mode). , it is possible to encourage players to actively participate in games.

Next, determination of reach random numbers will be described. In addition, the reach random number is set according to the number of reservations as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the pending number is 0 will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect (for example, 13.5 seconds or more) lottery result ( 22 random numbers are assigned to "with reach", and 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) that does not make the ready-to-win effect a viable variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery does not win big, the ready-to-win effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-win effect is a effect performed in the image display section 114 when special symbols are changed. Hereinafter, the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that does not make the reach production a variable pattern that can be executed is called a production without reach, and the production at the time of the special pattern fluctuation that makes the reach production a variation pattern that can be executed in response to this is a production with reach. call.

Here, if the reach is explained as an example, the reach random number (see S903, S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is the reach in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "0 to 21". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, at the time of special symbol fluctuation, the display control of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222 when not distinguished) is interlocked. , the image display unit 114 performs an effect using decorative patterns. The decorative pattern is formed by displaying three lines of patterns each consisting of a series of numerals 1 to 9, for example, written in succession in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time when the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbols (start of scrolling of the decorative symbols), the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. In general, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the same three numbers are arranged in a horizontal or oblique straight line in the stationary display of the decorative symbols. The effect using the decorative design that is performed along with the variable display of this special design is called a variable effect.

In the ready-to-win production, the following operations are performed with respect to decorative symbols as a variable production. First, any two patterns (sequences) are temporarily stopped before the decorative patterns scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are fixed and stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the scroll speed for the last line is gradually slowed down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up on a straight line. After the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixed and stopped.
Here, in the ready-to-win effect, there are cases where the SP ready-to-win effect or the SP/SP ready-to-win effect is performed before the three symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the SP reach effect is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than reach, and is a moving image production in which various characters appear and a story develops. . Also, SP/SP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than SP reach, and it is a moving image that various characters appear and stories develop. It is a production of
Further, as shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), SP ready-to-win or SP/SP ready-to-win effects are set to be executed. . It should be noted that the above-mentioned variable production that is performed together with the ready-to-win production is also referred to as a ready-to-reach variable production.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, until the decorative pattern that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixed and stopped, the production that gives the player a sense of expectation, such as the production with reach, is not performed. The symbols are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a diagonal straight line.

In this way, when the judgment result of the hit random number is a loss, the image display unit 114 performs a ready-to-win effect as a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect can be executed, or the ready-to-win effect can be executed. Decide whether to perform a no-reach production that is not a variation pattern. In addition, the ready-to-win random number changes the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect according to the number of reservations, thereby enabling efficient game progress and giving the player a moderate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a jackpot is won, a reach effect is performed, and finally, the decorative patterns are determined and stopped in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. can be done. On the other hand, in the ready-to-win effect in the case of winning a small prize or losing, the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and the winning value when the time saving flag is ON Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed when there is no time-saving state, the game is won with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 in the time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the hit random value (see S1003) acquired with the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

In addition, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of wins with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, like the jackpot pattern random number (see FIG. 17(b)) for specifying the type of jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the winning pattern random number for specifying the type of win in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number together with the random number of the winning random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and the normal symbol determination unit 232 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number Determine the type of win based on random numbers.
Note that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Although illustration is omitted, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is separately provided for other game states such as the high probability time saving gaming state.
In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121. As shown in FIG. Regarding the case where the game ball wins in the second start port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be provided separately, or the game ball wins in the first start port 121. A table to be referred to in each case may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the big winning symbol and the variation pattern random number when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13). . Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. determine the variation pattern based on whether For example, when the jackpot design is "high probability design A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" allocated to "high probability design A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, the special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the reach random number (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition unit 231 , determines whether it is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the pending number "0" of "missing" in FIG. 21 or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, when the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern random number (see S903) obtained together with the jackpot random number by the random number obtaining unit 231 is the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern random values assigned to “21” matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the variation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 controls the variation pattern random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball enters the starting holes 121 and 122, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the reach A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on conditions such as the presence or absence of performance and the number of reservations. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 . In the effect control unit 300, as will be described later, as the effect at the time of the special symbol variation, the effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) is produced. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control section 200 according to this embodiment. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22(a).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the RAM 203 has a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum value of the number of reservations of the first start port 121 and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4) . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage. It has a section 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area for storing information indicating whether the starting gate (first starting gate 121 or second starting gate 122) has won a prize. , an area for storing the acquired jackpot random numbers, an area for storing the pattern random numbers, an area for storing the reach random numbers, and an area for storing the fluctuation pattern random numbers. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random numbers are stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control section 300 according to this embodiment. FIG. 23(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 23(a).
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the RAM 303 has a first reservation storage area 305 and a second reservation storage area 306 as reservation status storage areas for storing the status of the reservation ball. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 correspond to the reservation of the winning to the first start gate 121 and the reservation of the winning to the second start gate 122, respectively. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d includes a hold flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the hold flag and a notification flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the notification flag. and a region. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a reserve ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is 3, the pending flags are turned ON in the three pending flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the result of prior determination according to the game state and effect situation. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the announcement effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the announcement effect is not performed. For example, when the notice effect is performed for the third held ball out of the three held balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage section 305c.

Although not shown, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter referred to as a prior determination information storage area) in which prior determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on the above random numbers. The content of the prior determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11), and specifically, whether or not the big hit (and whether or not the small hit), the big hit In the case of , it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, whether the variation pattern (variation time) is a length capable of executing the ready-to-win effect, and the contents of the variation pattern. The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is stored together with information (hereinafter referred to as retention information) related to the hold corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process has been performed, or independently of this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. - 特許庁

[Pre-judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination processing (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 .

FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the details of the preliminary determination processing (S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (S2401), and when it determines that it is a high probability state (Yes in S2401), A table is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot pattern random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, a table for low probability state is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the prior determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that it is the time saving state (Yes in S2404), The table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Furthermore, the table for time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for time saving non-state is selected, and the reach random number is determined in advance (S2407). Furthermore, the table for time saving no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2408).

Thereafter, the game control unit 200, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the prior determination of the reach random number, and the result of the prior determination of the variation pattern, It is stored in the advance judgment information storage area as advance judgment information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the effect control section 300, the preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is based on the random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and the determination table (see FIG. 20) used in the big hit determination process. ) and a decision table having the same structure as the one shown in FIG. That is, the judgment itself after selecting the judgment table to be used is the same as the judgment in the big win judgment process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine (see S1108 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the prior determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers in addition to the jackpot determination process in order to determine random numbers in the preliminary determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program relating to the jackpot determination process and the advance determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the big win determination, the determination table used for the big win determination may also be used for the preliminary determination.

In addition, here only the prior determination (whether it is a big hit or not) on the special symbol lottery was described, but in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (preliminary determination). I do. The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is a random number for variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122 and the variation pattern table (FIG. 21 (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the variation pattern, using the random number value for selecting the variation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table of the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol process, it is selected. Fluctuation patterns can be read ahead.

In this case, in order to foresee the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Moreover, regarding the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to prefetching of variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in program size.

It should be noted that, if the pre-determination process and the jackpot determination process at the time of special symbol variation are performed in the same subroutine using the same determination table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-determination result and the special symbol variation There may be a case where the judgment result by the big hit judging process of (1) is different. That is, it is a case where the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, or whether it is a time saving state or a time saving no state) changes before the start of the special symbol variation after the execution of the preliminary determination process. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used according to the gaming state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between when the preliminary determination process is executed and when the big win determination process is executed. . Therefore, even if the same random number obtained at the time of winning to the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the production control unit 300, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, if the game state changes before the start of the special symbol variation, the production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. can be done.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of the door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message such as "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state to the image display unit. 114 to display. In addition, the effect control unit 300 causes the speaker 156 to output an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state, and restricts the output of music, voice, sound effects, and the like. Moreover, the production|presentation control part 300 lights the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example as a mode which shows an abnormal state.

In addition, here, it was explained that the effect control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred. A mode using a part may be used. Also, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when a door open error occurs in area 020 in FIG. 24-3, all of image display section 114, board lamp 116, speaker 156, and frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Also, when a payout error occurs in area 021 in FIG. 24-3, the image display unit 114 and speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a game parlor (pachinko hall) clerk or the like to easily determine the degree of urgency of an error that has occurred in a game machine.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control section 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the operation of the effect control section 300. As shown in FIG.
The operation of the effect control section 300 consists of main processing shown in FIG. 25(a) and interrupt processing shown in FIG. 25(b). Referring to FIG. 25(a), the effect control unit 300 performs initial setting at the time of activation (S2501), and after performing cycle setting of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S2502), according to the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), interrupt processing is accepted.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25(b), in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect contents (effect pattern) are selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs effect button processing for accepting the player's operation of the effect button 161 or the like (S2512). Thereafter, the effect control section 300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 (S2513). As a result, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, movement of the movable accessory 115, and light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by production control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command have been received (S2601). It should be noted that the pre-determined result command and the pending number increase command are set in the starting opening switch process shown in FIG. ) is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
And, when the effect control unit 300 determines that it has received the pre-determination result command and the reservation number increase command (Yes in S2601), it adds 1 to the value of the reservation number held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the reservation number increase command (S2603). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the prior determination result command and the pending number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation start command (S2604). This variation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the variation start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control section 300 executes effect selection processing (S2605). In addition, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random value is a random value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main processing shown in FIG. 25(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the pre-determination result command, the hold number increase command and the variation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing shown in FIG. 8 (S806).
When the received command is the fluctuation stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control section 300 executes the process during the end of the fluctuation effect (S2607). In addition, in the processing during the end of the fluctuation production, the production control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command, and sets the fluctuation production end command for instructing the end of the production of the pattern fluctuation in the RAM303.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command and a variation stop command (No in S2601, S2604 and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for opening (S2608). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopped process shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes a jackpot effect selection process (S2609). Details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command and an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606 and S2608), the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game (S2610). This ending command is a command that is set in the big winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes at S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes ending effect selection processing (S2611). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command and an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608 and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , a customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the pending number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects the effect pattern (predetermined effect pattern) used in the predetermined effect based on the predetermination result command and the pending number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that give advance notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the variation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a pending display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 and the second special symbol reservation display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, the image display unit 114 performs a hold display suggesting the occurrence of a hold or the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this holding display effect, by reflecting the preliminary judgment result in the display mode etc. of the holding display, the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that concerning the holding ball is sent to the player. It can be a pre-judgment production to suggest.

In addition, although the case where the pending display effect is used as a pre-determination effect is explained here, by reflecting it in the contents of various effects performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of the random number by the special symbol processing, various notice effects It becomes possible to do For example, a production using a production image displayed on the image display unit 114, a production by light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, a production by the movement of movable accessories, a production by sound output such as music and sound effects, etc. It can be set as a judgment production pattern.

In addition, the pre-determination effect is executed along with the symbol variation for the other winning balls performed prior to the symbol variation for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination has been performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holding balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). Moreover, priority is given to digestion of the ball held in the second starting port 122 . In this case, for example, if the preliminary determination is made for the held ball with the second starting port 122, before the pattern fluctuation for the held ball is performed, including the fluctuation currently fluctuating (referred to as the fluctuation), Symbol variation is performed for a maximum of four winning balls. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been pre-determined, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change is performed for the reserved ball, the notice effect that spans the multiple pattern changes (continuous notice effect ).

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the pending number command including the value of the added pending number and the information of the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process to the RAM 303 (S2804). In order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determined effect pattern, the number-of-holds command includes information indicating the pattern. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2811). Also, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, and the fluctuation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation production pattern for symbol variation by image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets a variable production start command for instructing the execution start of the selected production in the RAM303 (S2814). The variable effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. When the CPU 311 receives the variable effect start command, the VDP 314 draws images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern, and creates a display list or the like for output processing. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data for representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting a variation performance pattern for symbol variation in S2813, a variation performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the advance notice effect, etc. are determined. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is effect display performed by the image display unit 114 along with the variable display of the special symbols performed by the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 . In the variable display of the decorative symbols, a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation production patterns are set for the variation pattern, the production random number (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25 (a) , Acquire production random value when receiving fluctuation start command) may be used to select a fluctuation production pattern by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) in FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3001), and selects a pattern of effect (jackpot effect pattern) (S3002). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the big win effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, The jackpot effect selection process is terminated (S3003). As a result, the effect during the big hit is determined. It should be noted that in the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects a pattern of effect (ending effect pattern) (S3102). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, Ending effect selection processing is terminated (S3103). It should be noted that in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to a customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202), and turns ON the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control section 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after turning ON in Yes or S3203 in S3204), the production control unit 300 next determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). is determined (S3205). If the time has not expired (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and transmits a customer waiting effect command for performing a customer waiting effect (demonstration effect) to the RAM 303. is set to end the customer waiting command reception process (S3207).

When the command receiving process is completed as described above, any one of a variable performance start command, a variable performance end command, a big hit performance start command, an ending performance start command, and a customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303. - 特許庁

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect button processing (S2512 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated by the player during a predetermined acceptance period (effective period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operation means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key or the peripheral key of the effect key 162 to turn it on. Further, when an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100, detection of the operation of the device is included. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

If the operation means such as the production button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the production control unit 300 sets the production button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303, and ends the production button processing. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) in FIG. Send to the control unit 320 . Based on the received command, the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, output sound, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. to execute the set production.

[Variation production pattern table]
32 and 33 are diagrams showing setting examples of the variable effect patterns and tables used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27(b). In addition, FIG. 32 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low probability time saving non-playing state, and FIG.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for big win shown in FIG. For the variation patterns “PA1” to “PA6”, “PB1” to “PB14”, and “PC1 to PC2” set using FIG. 21 above, the variation production patterns “EA1” to “EA6”, “ EB1” to “EB14” and “EC1 to EC2” are associated on a one-to-one basis.
In addition, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for small hits and losses shown in FIG. With respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. are mapped.

Here, the variable performance is a performance for visually notifying the judgment result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not the player has won a big hit) by displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stop-displaying them.
In addition, in the illustrated variable performance pattern, "pseudo-continuous times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach" and "stop pattern" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number" is the number of pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-runs). This pseudo-continuous production is a production that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols is being performed in the variable display of the special symbols for one variation. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 temporarily stops the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols before entering the ready-to-win state, and then restarts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed. End the variable display. Here, the term "temporary stop" refers to a pseudo-stopped state in which the decorative patterns appear to be stopped at first glance, but actually the patterns are slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols is treated as a continuous variation in terms of game control. Further, the determination and stoppage of the decorative symbols means a state in which the special symbols are determined as the stopped symbols in the variable display for one variation of the special symbols.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the pseudo-continuous number of times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability), which is the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the degree of expectation is set to be higher as the number of pseudo consecutive times is larger.

"Normal" indicates the type of ready-to-win effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of ready-to-win effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"SPSP reach" indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2" and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

A “stop symbol” indicates a combination of decorative symbols displayed as a stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the types of stop symbols are "777", "666", "444", "RRR", "5X5" and the like. In the illustrated example, the type of stop symbol is set according to the type of jackpot. For example, in low-probability symbol A and low-probability symbol B, which are jackpots that are in a low-probability state after the jackpot, even-numbered stop symbols "444" and "666" are set. Further, in the high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol C which are the high-probability state after the big win, the odd stop symbols "777" and "111" are set.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG.
For example, in FIG. 32, when the "big win symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Also, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

[Production image]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 34 , the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300 . In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include the decorative pattern 41, the moving image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth pattern 56. FIG.
Each of the effect images described above will be described below.

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), three decorative designs 41 are displayed on the image display section 114 . In addition, when the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern on the right side. The pattern arranged in the 2 is referred to as a "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41".

Decorative pattern 41 of the present embodiment is configured by combining a plurality of image elements. In this embodiment, as image elements that can form the decorative pattern 41, there are provided a numeral element 411 representing a numeral, a numeral decorative element 412 decorating the numeral element 411, and a character element 413 representing a character. Further, in the present embodiment, as part of the character element 413, an image that flickers around the character (so-called aura) is displayed.

In the variable rendering of the decorative symbols 41, the effect control unit 300 variably displays the three decorative symbols 41 by vertical scrolling, for example, and then temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "1"). Next, the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "6") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped. Incidentally, the combination "213" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, the decorative pattern 41 in which the three pieces are not aligned is called a misaligned decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Further, the area in which the left decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed in the display area of the image display section 114 is an example of the first area. Further, the area in which the right decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed in the display area of the image display section 114 is an example of the second area. Further, the area in which the middle decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed in the display area of the image display section 114 is an example of the third area.

[Variation image 51]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 displays that the special symbol is fluctuating (the decorative symbol 41 is displayed fluctuating) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A variation image 51 shown is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbols during the variable display of the special symbols. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion of the display area of the image display unit 114) at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variation image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation image 51 is based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process by changing the display mode of the color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "color etc."), for example. announcing or suggesting

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). That is, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
In addition, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the variable pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes.

In addition, the pending image 52 informs or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process by changing the display mode such as color. Furthermore, it is set such that when the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process is a big hit, the color of the type with a higher degree of expectation is displayed than in the case of a loss. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expectations may be set higher in this order.

Here, as described above, winning at the first starting port 121 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning at the first starting port 121 . Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 52 are displayed side by side in the area on the right side of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 toward a position farther away, that is, from left to right. be.

Although not shown, even winning a prize at the second starting port 122 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning the prize at the second starting port 122 .
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form.

Further, in the following description, the maximum of four reserved images 52 displayed are "first reserved image 52", "second reserved image 52", and "third Reserved image 52" and "fourth reserved image 52".

[Pending number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 .

[4th pattern 56]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 displays a special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A fourth pattern 56 is displayed, which indicates that it is in the process of changing (during display of the decorative pattern 41 in a variable manner). The fourth symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300 and displayed in different modes according to the variation and stoppage of the special symbol.
In addition, when the three patterns constituting the fourth pattern 56 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left fourth pattern 56", and the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle fourth pattern 56". ”, and the symbol arranged on the right side is called a “fourth right symbol 56 ”. Further, when collectively describing the left fourth pattern 56 and the right fourth pattern 56, they are referred to as "left and right fourth patterns 56".

In the illustrated example, the fourth pattern 56 is three images each corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 and displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the image display section 114 . This fourth design 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative design 41 . In addition, as will be described later, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness or in a display mode with low decorativeness. It is displayed in the display mode.

The fourth pattern 56 is displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner indicating that the special pattern is fluctuating as the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is won. Then, the fourth symbol 56 stops when the special symbols stop changing. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped fourth symbol 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41 . To explain further, in the example of FIG. 34(1), a number corresponding to "213" is displayed as the fourth pattern 56. As shown in FIG.

[Variation production example 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variable effect example 1) will be specifically described. Variation production example 1 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time saving non-gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 34(1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. and Also, at this time, the image display section 114 displays the decorative pattern 41 , the moving image 51 , the pending image 52 , the pending number display 55 , and the fourth pattern 56 .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Thus, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the second, third, and fourth pending images 52 move toward the position where the variable image 51 is displayed. Also, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the pending number display 55 is switched from "4" to "3".
Incidentally, when the drawing indicates that the decorative pattern 41 is being variably displayed at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 41 is indicated by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34(3), the left decorative pattern 41 is changed at a low speed, and then, as shown in FIG. be. The left decorative pattern 41 operates when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 41 (number "4") raises its right hand when temporarily stopped. In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark in the vicinity of the decorative pattern 41 for easy understanding.
Subsequently, the right decorative pattern 41 is changed at a low speed as shown in FIG. 34(5), and then temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of the change as shown in FIG. 34(6). be. The right decorative pattern 41 operates when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the right decorative pattern 41 (the number "1") raises its right hand when temporarily stopped.

When the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stopped at the position. The middle decorative pattern 41 operates when it is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the middle decorative pattern 41 (number "2") raises its right hand when temporarily stopped.
When the middle decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the three decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then, as the special pattern stops fluctuating, as shown in FIG. be stopped. The combination “421” of the stationary decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 34(8) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

In this way, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and fixedly stopped at the position (variation start position) when the variable display is started. Thereby, the variation of the next decorative pattern 41 can be started smoothly without moving the decorative pattern 41 which is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped to the variation start position.
In addition, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time of fluctuation, temporary stop, and fixed stop. In other words, while the middle decorative pattern 41 is superimposed on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41, the variation, temporary stop, and fixed stop are performed.

[Variation production example 2]
FIGS. 35 to 37 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, an effect mode corresponding to the game state is provided. Specifically, there are provided an A mode as an effect mode in the low probability time saving non-game state and a B mode as an effect mode in the high probability time saving game state.
In the A mode, as shown in FIG. 35(A-1), a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is used. As shown in FIG. 35(A-2), as the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, the pending number display 55 switches from "1" to "0". Further, after the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, the left decorative pattern 41 (the number "4" in the illustrated example) is changed at a low speed as shown in FIG. -4), it is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(A-5), the right decorative pattern 41 (the number "4" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position. As a result, the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are aligned to establish a ready-to-win state, and a ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, when a ready-to-win game is established, a ready-to-win set drawing effect that is an effect using the decorative pattern 41 is performed.

When the ready-to-win state is established, as shown in FIG. 36(A-6), a character pattern enlarged display effect is performed in which the character elements 413 in the highly decorative left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed. . Specifically, when reach is established, the display area of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 becomes wider in the image display section 114 than before establishment of reach. On the other hand, the numeric elements 411 and the numeric decorative elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged and displayed even if reach is established.

In addition, as a ready-to-win stage design effect, a separation effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are separated from each other. More specifically, when reach is established, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move away from each other. More specifically, the left decorative design 41 moves to the left side of the display area of the image display section 114, and the right decorative design 41 moves to the right side of the display area of the image display section 114. do. In other words, the left and right decorative designs 41 move away from the middle decorative design 41 . In this variable effect, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move away from each other while enlarging when reach is established.

36(A-7), the left decorative design 41 moves to the left end of the display area of the image display section 114, and the right decorative design 41 moves to the left side of the image display section 114. Move to the right edge of the display area. The display position after the left and right decorative patterns 41 are moved by the separation effect is hereinafter referred to as the separation position.

When the separation effect is performed, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are displayed in reduced size. Specifically, when the separation effect is performed, the display area of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 in the image display section 114 is narrowed. In the illustrated example, the display size of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 has returned to the display size before the establishment of reach.
Also, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a manner that a part of them can be seen from the display area of the image display section 114 . Specifically, the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 is cut off from the left end of the display area of the image display section 114 . In the illustrated example, part of the aura of the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right hand are out of the display area of the image display section 114 . Also, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 is cut off from the right end of the display area of the image display section 114 . In the illustrated example, part of the aura and the back hair of the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 are cut off from the display area of the image display section 114 . On the other hand, the numeric elements 411 and the numeric decorative elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 fit within the display area of the image display section 114 .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(A-8), the middle decorative pattern 41 is varied at low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is moved closer to the player than the left and right decorative patterns 41 are. Also, at this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is varied in a display size larger than each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 . In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 is varied in such a manner that the display area in the image display section 114 is wider than each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 . Specifically, the numeric elements 411 of the middle decorative pattern 41 have a wider display area than the numeric elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41, and the numeric decorative elements 412 of the middle decorative pattern 41 have a larger display area than the left and right decorative patterns 41. The display area is wider than each number decorative element 412, and the character element 413 of the middle decorative pattern 41 has a wider display area than each character element 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41. - 特許庁

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37(A-9), the middle decorative pattern 41 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the nearer side than the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加In other words, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed superimposed on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41 .

When the decorative symbols 41 of the misaligned line are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. An approaching display effect to be displayed is performed. More specifically, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other. More specifically, the left decorative pattern 41 is positioned horizontally in the display area of the image display section 114 and moves to the right, and the right decorative pattern 41 is positioned horizontally in the display area of the image display section 114 and moves to the left side. An action to move to is performed. In other words, the left and right decorative patterns 41 move toward the middle decorative pattern 41 . As a result, the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the fluctuation start positions. Then, the left and right decorative patterns 41 come to fit within the display area of the image display section 114 . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. Specifically, the numerical element 411, the numerical decorative element 412, and the character element 413 of the middle decorative pattern 41 have a narrower display area in the image display section 114 than when the middle decorative pattern 41 is changed at a low speed. . In the illustrated example, the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 is the same as the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 (see FIG. 35A-1) at the start of the variation. Also, in this variable effect, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size during execution of the approaching display effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 37(A-11), the three decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加In other words, the middle decorative pattern 41 is superimposed on the back side of the left and right decorative patterns 41 and displayed. In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped, the fourth pattern 56 is also stopped.

On the other hand, in the B mode, as shown in FIG. 35(B-1), a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is used. Numeric elements 411 and numeric decorative elements 412 are provided as image elements that can form the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode. On the other hand, the character element 413 is not provided as an image element capable of constructing the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode. Also, the display size of the numeric elements 411 of the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode is larger than the display size of the numeric elements 411 of the decorative pattern 41 used in the A mode. Also, the display size of the numeric decorative elements 412 of the decorative pattern 41 used in the B mode is larger than the display size of the numeric decorative elements 412 of the decorative pattern 41 used in the A mode.

In addition, the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed hitting image 79 to notify that the player is in a so-called right-handed state, in which the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right. In addition, the variable pedestal of the variable image 51 is switched from the display mode before the jackpot game (for example, see FIG. 34 (1)) as the game state shifts to the high probability time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 35(B-2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35(B-3), the left decorative design 41 (the number "4" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped at the fluctuation start position.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35(B-4), the right decorative pattern 41 (in the illustrated example, the number "4") swings up and down, and the right decorative pattern 41, which is the same as the left decorative pattern 41, temporarily stops. A reach-inciting production is performed to instigate the possibility that it will be done. In this ready-to-win effect, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed. Specifically, in the ready-to-win stage effect, the display area of the number elements 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 is wider than the display area of the number element 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the ready-to-win stage effect. In addition, in the ready-to-win-flavor performance, the display area of the number decorative elements 412 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 becomes wider than the display area of the number-decorating elements 412 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the ready-to-win-flavor performance.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(B-5), the right decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped, and the ready-to-win effect is executed with the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 aligned. Here, also in the B mode, when the ready-to-win state is established, the ready-to-win state drawing effect using the decorative pattern 41 is performed.
When a ready-to-win state is established, a number-enlarged display effect is performed as a ready-to-win set design effect in which the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in an enlarged manner. Specifically, when ready-to-win is established, the display area of the numerical elements 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 becomes wider than the display area of the numerical elements 411 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 during the ready-to-win effect. . Further, when the ready-to-win is established, the display area of the number decorative elements 412 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 becomes wider than the display area of the number decorative elements 412 in each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 at the time of the ready-to-win stage effect. Further, since the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed, the distance between the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 becomes shorter than before the ready-to-win is established.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(B-6), the three decorative patterns 41 are hidden through a transition effect in which a transition image 60 is displayed. As the transition effect, for example, the screen of the image display unit 114 is temporarily turned white (white-out) or blackened (black-out) so that the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. can be done.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36(B-7), the SP ready-to-win effect develops. In the present embodiment, an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed as the SP ready-to-win effect. This SP reach effect image 61 is an image in which a character (inadvertently Sabei) who eats food is drawn.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(B-8), a loss suggestion image 62 suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be a loss, specifically, the character (inadvertently sandbei) has eaten. An image is displayed indicating that the food was not delicious.
Subsequently, through the transition effect shown in FIG. 37(B-9), the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 37(B-10). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment returns to the display size before the ready-to-win effect, that is, the display size at the start of the variation. At this time, the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the variation start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 37(B-11), after the light emitting effect is performed in which the temporarily stopped three decorative patterns 41 are illuminated, the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed as shown in FIG. 37(B-12). is fixed and stopped.

As described above, in the variation effect example 2, in the B mode, after the reach is established, the number enlargement display effect is performed. On the other hand, in the A mode, the number enlargement display effect is not performed after the reach is established. Here, in the A mode, since the numeric elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged and displayed after the ready-to-win, the display area of the effect image other than the numeric elements 411 such as the character element 413 is widened. In addition, in the B mode, since the numeric elements 411 of the left and right decorative symbols 41 are enlarged and displayed after the ready-to-win state, it is possible to perform an effect that strongly impresses the player as to which symbol has established the ready-to-win state. That is, an effect to focus attention on the effect image other than the number element 411 of the decorative pattern 41, and an effect to impress the player as to which decorative pattern 41 is aligned to establish a ready-to-win state are performed according to the mode (game state). You can switch.

In addition, in the variation effect example 2, in the A mode, when the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line is temporarily stopped after the establishment of the ready-to-win state, an approaching display effect is performed, and the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line is displayed at the variation start position. be. On the other hand, in the B mode, when the decorative pattern 41 for the missed position is temporarily stopped after establishment of ready-to-win, the decorative pattern 41 for the missed position is displayed at the variation start position without performing the approaching display effect.

Here, when the approaching display effect is performed after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the player will pay attention to the moving left and right decorative symbols 41 . By moving the left and right decorative patterns 41, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 approach each other toward the middle decorative pattern 41, so that the player can determine which decorative pattern 41 is the combination of the three decorative patterns 41. It becomes easy to recognize whether it was displayed with .
On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which the variable performance by the B mode is performed, compared to the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. If the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after establishment of ready-to-win, the player is likely to be discouraged. In this case, if the approaching display effect is performed so that the player pays attention to the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line, the player's interest may be lowered.

Therefore, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye after establishment of the ready-to-win in the high-probability time-saving game state, the approaching display effect is not performed so that the player is not focused on the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch depending on the game state whether or not to perform an effect to make the player pay attention to the decorative symbol 41 of the losing eye.
In addition, in the B mode, the approaching display effect is not performed, but in the state where the decorative pattern 41 of the misaligned line is displayed at the variation start position, the temporary stop and the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41 of the misaligned line are performed. You can smoothly start the next change.

In addition, in the variable effect example 2, in A mode, the number enlargement display effect is not performed after the reach is established (0%), and in the B mode, the number enlargement display effect is always performed after the reach is established (100%). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, after the reach is established, the number enlargement display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in the B mode, after the ready-to-win state is established, the number enlargement display performance may not be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the ready-to-win state is established, the B mode is more likely than the A mode to perform control so that the number enlargement display performance is performed. In other words, when the ready-to-win state is established, the B mode is controlled so that it is easier to perform the enlarged number display effect after the ready-to-win state is established in the B mode than in the A mode. Here, in B mode, it is easier to perform the enlarged number display effect after the reach is established than in the A mode. It also includes not performing the number enlargement display effect (0%) after establishment.

Also, the numeric element 411 is regarded as a specific identification element for identifying the design of the decorative design 41 . That is, in the present embodiment, when reach is established, control is performed so that the B mode is easier to enlarge and display a specific identification element after the reach is established than in A mode. Further, when performing the enlarged number display effect, the number decoration element 412 may be displayed enlarged or may not be displayed enlarged.

In addition, in the variation production example 2, in the A mode, the ready-to-win production is performed, that is, before the establishment of the ready-to-win, the numerical elements 411 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged (0%), and in the B-mode, the ready-to-win is displayed. Although the numeral elements 411 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are always enlarged (100%) and displayed before establishment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, before the ready-to-win state is established, a ready-to-win effect may be displayed with a predetermined probability, that is, the numeric elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be enlarged and displayed. Further, in the B mode, it is not necessary to enlarge and display the numerical elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 with a predetermined probability before the ready-to-win state is established. However, the B mode has a higher probability than the A mode, and control is performed so that the numeral elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed before the ready-to-win state is established. In other words, in the B mode, control is performed so that the numeral elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are more easily enlarged than in the A mode before the ready-to-win state is established. Here, in the B mode, it is easier to enlarge the number elements 411 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the ready-to-win is established than in the A mode. 411 must be enlarged (100%), and in the A mode, the numeral elements 411 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged (0%) before establishment of reach.
It should be noted that when performing the ready-to-win effect, the number decoration element 412 may be displayed in an enlarged manner, or may not be displayed in an enlarged manner.

Further, in the example 2 of variation production, both the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed as the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, either one of the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be displayed in an enlarged manner, and the other may not be displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, for example, both the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be displayed in an enlarged manner, and either one of the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may be displayed in a larger size than the other.

In addition, in the variation performance example 2, when the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after establishment of ready-to-win in A mode, approaching display performance is always performed (100%), and ready-to-win is established in B mode. When the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped later, the approaching display effect is not performed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the A mode, even when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, the approaching display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, even in the case where the decorative pattern 41 of the shifted position is temporarily stopped after the ready-to-win state is established in the B mode, the approaching display performance may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 at the deviation after establishment of the ready-to-win, control is performed so that the approaching display effect is performed with a higher probability in the A mode than in the B mode. In other words, when the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, the A mode is controlled so that the closer display performance is easier to perform than the B mode. Here, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 on the off-track after establishing the ready-to-win state, it is easier to perform the approaching display effect in the A mode than in the B mode. In the case of temporarily stopping 41, the approaching display effect is always performed (100%), and in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 on the side after reaching reach in B mode, the approaching display effect is not performed (0%). It also includes making

[Variation production example 3]
FIGS. 38 to 40 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 2 of variation presentation will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 of variation presentation may be omitted.
Also in the variable performance example 3, similarly to the variable performance example 2, there are provided an A mode as a performance mode in a low probability time saving non-game state and a B mode as a performance mode in a high probability time saving game state.

In the A mode, first, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and FIGS. is done. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(A-1), a production button image 63 imitating the production button 161 is displayed while the middle decorative pattern 41 is being variably displayed.

When the player operates the production button 161 while the production button image 63 is being displayed, the decorative pattern 41 goes through the transition production shown in FIG. Then, it moves upward in the display area of the image display unit 114 while shrinking. Specifically, left decorative design 41 moves to the upper left corner of the display area of image display section 114 , and right decorative design 41 moves to the upper right corner of the display area of image display section 114 . Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness. That is, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display section 114 is provided with the numeric element 411 and the numeric decorative element 412 but is not provided with the character element 413 . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is hidden.
And it develops into SP reach production. As the SP reach effect, the display of the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is performed. This SP reach front-stage image 64 is an image in which a character (Kukkari Sabei) who prepares a dish is drawn.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38A-4, an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed and an effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, a cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 39(A-5). This cut-in image 65 is an image depicting a scene in which a character (Yushichi the windmill) appears as a cooking helper. Also, at this time, the three decorative patterns 41 are hidden.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39(A-6), an SPSP ready-to-win pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP ready-to-win effect. This SPSP reach front-stage image 66 is an image depicting a scene in which Sabei carelessly cooperates with Yushichi the windmill to cook.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39(A-7), the SPSP reach post-stage image 67 is displayed. This SPSP reach latter-stage image 67 is an image depicting a scene in which Sabei and Yushichi the windmill inadvertently eat food. At this time, another effect button image 68 different from the effect button image 63 is displayed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes and becomes a mode similar to the other effect button image 68 .
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. A jackpot suggestion image 69 is displayed. This jackpot suggestive image 69 is an image showing that the food that Sabei and Yushichi of the windmill inadvertently ate was delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40(A-9), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed in combination of "444". Specifically, each of the three decorative designs 41 is displayed in a display size larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative designs 41 enlarged and displayed by the character design enlarged display effect. Also, at this time, part of the left decorative pattern 41 and part of the right decorative pattern 41 are superimposed on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the middle decoration is displayed in the display area of each of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41. The display area of the pattern 41 is wider.
In addition, the decorative pattern 41 having all three is hereinafter referred to as a double-sided decorative pattern 41 .

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40(A-10), the decorative pattern 41 of the double stitches is displayed in a reduced size. Specifically, the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the establishment of the ready-to-win. At this time, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other. As a result, the double-sided decorative pattern 41 returns to the variation start position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(A-11), after the light emitting effect of the temporarily stopped double decorative pattern 41 is performed, as shown in FIG. 40(A-12), the double double decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. In addition, the fourth design 56 is also stopped along with the confirmation stop of the decorative design 41 of double eyes. The combination “444” of the stationary decorative symbols 41 shown in FIG. 40(A-12) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

On the other hand, in the B mode, first, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. A performance is held. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(B-1), the SP ready-to-win effect develops. As the SP reach effect, the display of the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(B-2), an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed. Also, at this time, an effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. A jackpot suggestion image 70 is displayed. This second jackpot suggestive image 70 is an image showing that the food that Sabei inadvertently ate was delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38(B-4), three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are enlarged and displayed in combination of "444". Specifically, each of the three decorative designs 41 is displayed in a display size larger than the display size of the decorative design 41 before the establishment of ready-to-win. Also, at this time, part of the left decorative pattern 41 and part of the right decorative pattern 41 are superimposed on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed more than the display area of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41. The display area of is wider.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39(B-5), the decorative pattern 41 of the double stitches is displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the display size of each doublet decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display size of the decorative pattern 41 that has been fixed and stopped (see FIG. 35(B-1)). At this time, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other. The doublet decorative pattern 41 is displayed at a position different from the variation start position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 39(B-6), after the light emission effect of the temporarily stopped parallel decorative pattern 41 is performed, as shown in FIG. 39(B-7), the parallel decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped. In addition, the fourth design 56 is also stopped along with the confirmation stop of the decorative design 41 of double eyes.

As described above, in the variation effect example 3, in both the A mode and the B mode, the decoration pattern 41 is displayed in an enlarged size from the display size before establishment of the ready-to-win state. As a result, it is possible to perform an impactful presentation by using the decorative pattern 41 of double eyes.
Also, in both the A mode and the B mode, the double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size after being displayed in an enlarged size. At this time, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other (see FIG. 39(B-5) and FIG. 40(A-10)). As a result, it is possible to give a stronger impression to the player that the three decorative patterns 41 are aligned.

In addition, in the variable effect example 3, in the A mode, it was explained that the double-sided decorative pattern 41 displayed in an enlarged manner returns to the variable start position while being displayed in a reduced size, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the enlarged display of the double decorative pattern 41 being displayed in reduced size, the double double decorative pattern 41 is displayed at a position different from the variation start position, and the double double decorative pattern 41 is illuminated at this position. and a definite stop may be made.
Also, in the B mode, it has been described that the enlarged double-sided decorative pattern 41 is displayed at a position different from the variation start position as a result of the reduced display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the enlarged display of the double decorative pattern 41 being displayed in reduced size, the double decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the variation start position, and at this position, the light emitting effect and final stop of the double decorative pattern 41 are performed. may be done.

In addition, in the variable effect example 3, in the A mode, the display size of each of the parallel decorative patterns 41 displayed in reduced size after the enlarged display returns to the display size of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before establishment of ready-to-win. has been described, but is not limited to this. For example, the display size of each of the parallel decorative patterns 41 that are displayed in reduced size after the enlarged display may be larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before establishment of ready-to-win.
In addition, in the B mode, it has been explained that the display size of each of the double decorative patterns 41 reduced after being enlarged is larger than the display size of the fixed and stopped decorative patterns 41, but this is not the case. not. For example, the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 displayed in reduced size after the enlarged display may return to the display size of the decorative pattern 41 that has been fixed and stopped.

[Variation production example 4]
FIGS. 41 to 43 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, another specific example (variation production example 4) of the variation production of the decorative symbol 41 in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state will be described. In addition, in the following description, differences from example 2 and example 3 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 and example 3 of variable effect may be omitted.

35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and FIGS. 36(A-5) to 36(A-7). , as shown in FIG. 41(1), the middle decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed in the same mode as the effect described with reference to FIG. 36(A-8).
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41(2), an effect button image 63 may be displayed during the variable display of the middle decorative pattern 41 .

When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed as shown in FIG. 42(2) (FIG. 41(2)), a special symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 42(4). A second loss suggesting image 74 is displayed that suggests that the lottery result of the lottery may be a loss. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42(5), the missing decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP ready-to-win effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42(6), an approaching display effect is performed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size. After being temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 42(7). The effects described with reference to FIGS. 42(6) and 42(7) are the same as the effects described with reference to FIGS. 37(A-10) and 37(A-11).

Further, after the medium symbol 41 shown in FIG. 41(1) is variably displayed, a transition effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 41(3). 43(3) (FIG. 41(3)), the decorative pattern 41 moves upward in the display area of the image display section 114 while shrinking as shown in FIG. 43(8). do. Specifically, left decorative design 41 moves to the upper left corner of the display area of image display section 114 , and right decorative design 41 moves to the upper right corner of the display area of image display section 114 . At this time, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness, that is, the numeric element 411 and the numeric decorative element 412 are provided, while the character element 413 is provided. It is a decorative pattern 41 that does not exist.
In addition, it develops into SP reach production. As the SP reach effect, the display of the SP reach pre-stage image 64 is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43(9), an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed. Also, at this time, another effect button image 68 is displayed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes into a mode similar to the other effect button image 68 . When the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is being displayed, the loss suggesting image 62 is displayed as shown in FIG. 43(10). At this time, the medium decorative pattern 41 (in the illustrated example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped. The middle decorative pattern 41 has a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加

Subsequently, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a state of being switched to a highly decorative mode as shown in FIG. 43(12) through the transition effect shown in FIG. be stopped. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the character pattern enlarged display effect. Also, at this time, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 on the image display section 114 have returned from the separated positions to the fluctuation start positions. That is, the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the fluctuation start positions without performing the approaching display effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 43(13), the temporarily stopped lost decorative pattern 41 is illuminated, and then, as shown in FIG. 43(14), the lost decorative pattern 41 is confirmed and stopped. be done.

As described above, in the variable effect example 4, after the ready-to-win is established, if the decorative pattern 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped without developing into the SP ready-to-win effect, the approaching display effect is performed, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed. returns from the separated position to the change start position. On the other hand, when the SP ready-to-win effect develops after the ready-to-win state is established, and the decorative pattern 41 on the out-of-line position is temporarily stopped after that, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are shifted to the distant positions without performing the approaching display effect. , and returns to the starting position.

Here, when the approaching display effect is performed after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the player will pay attention to the moving left and right decorative symbols 41 . By moving the left and right decorative patterns 41, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move closer to each other toward the middle decorative pattern 41, so that the player can determine which of the three decorative patterns 41 is a combination of the decorative patterns 41. It becomes easy to recognize whether it was displayed with .
On the other hand, when the variation production develops into the SP ready-to-win production, compared to the case where it does not develop, the player can easily expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit, so the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment is increased. When displayed, the player is likely to be discouraged. In this case, if the approaching display effect is performed to make the player pay attention to the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line, the player's interest may decrease.

Therefore, in the case of temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line after the development to the SP ready-to-win performance, the approaching display performance is not performed so that the player does not pay attention to the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line. , suppresses the decline in interest of the player. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform an effect that makes the player pay attention to the decorative pattern 41 of the losing eye depending on whether or not the SP ready-to-win effect develops.
In addition, when the ready-to-win state develops into the SP ready-to-win effect and the decorative pattern 41 on the left side is temporarily stopped after that, the approaching display effect is not performed, but the left and right decorative patterns 41 are moved from the separated position to the start position of the movement. By returning to , it is possible to smoothly start the next change.

In addition, in the example 4 of variable performance, when the decorative pattern 41 of the deviation is temporarily stopped without progressing to the SP ready-to-win performance after the ready-to-win is established, the approaching display performance is always performed (100%). . In addition, when the SP ready-to-win performance is developed after the ready-to-win is established, and then the decorative pattern 41 of the missing line is temporarily stopped, the approaching display performance is not performed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, even if the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped without progressing to the SP ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win is established, the approaching display effect may not be performed with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if SP ready-to-win performance is developed after establishment of ready-to-win, and the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped after that, the approaching display performance may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 of the misaligned line is temporarily stopped after the ready-to-win is established, the closer display performance is performed at a higher probability when the SP ready-to-win performance is not developed than when the SP ready-to-win performance is developed. to control. In other words, when the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, it is easier to perform the approaching display effect when the SP ready-to-win effect does not develop than when the SP ready-to-win effect develops. Control. Here, in the case where the decorative pattern 41 of the gap is temporarily stopped after the ready-to-win state is established, it is easier to perform the approaching display effect when the SP ready-to-win effect is not developed than when the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. Also, when the ready-to-win state does not develop into the SP ready-to-win effect, the approaching display effect is always performed (100%), and when the ready-to-win effect develops into the SP ready-to-win effect, the approaching display effect is not performed (0%). included.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed (see FIG. 42(2)), the second loss suggesting image 74 (see FIG. 42(4) ) were displayed, but are not limited to this. For example, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is being displayed, the big win suggestion image 69 (see FIG. 39 (A-3)) may be displayed. That is, at the first timing in the variable production, a first win-lose production is performed in which either one of the second loss suggesting image 74 and the big win suggesting image 69 is selectively displayed based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. may
Also, when the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is being displayed (see FIG. 43(9)), the failure suggestion image 62 (see FIG. 43(10)) is displayed. , but not limited to. For example, when the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is being displayed, the second big win suggestion image 70 (see FIG. 38(B-3)) may be displayed. That is, at the second timing after the first timing in the variable effect, either one of the display of the losing suggestion image 62 and the display of the second big win suggestion image 70 is selectively displayed based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. A second win-lose effect may be performed.

Also, the effect button image 63 is displayed when performing the first win-lose effect, and another effect button image 68 is displayed when performing the second win-lose effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, another effect button image 68 may be displayed instead of the effect button image 63 when performing the first win-lose effect. Further, the effect button image 63 may be displayed instead of the other effect button image 68 when the second win-lose effect is performed. However, when performing the first win-lose effect, control is performed so that the effect button image 63 is displayed more easily than when performing the second win-lose effect. In other words, when the second win-lose effect is performed, the other effect button image 68 is controlled to be displayed more easily than when the first win-lose effect is performed.

In addition, in the variation production example 4, it was explained that the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is longer in the case of developing into the SP ready-to-win production than in the case of not developing into the SP ready-to-win production after the establishment of ready-to-win. , but not limited to.
For example, depending on the variable performance, the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 may be longer when the SP ready-to-win effect is not developed after the ready-to-win effect is established than when the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. However, in the case of developing into SP ready-to-win performance, the probability is higher than in the case of not developing into SP ready-to-win performance after establishment of ready-to-win, and control is performed so that the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 becomes longer. In other words, control is performed so that the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is likely to be longer in the case where the SP ready-to-win performance is developed than in the case where the SP ready-to-win performance is not developed after the establishment of the ready-to-win state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is longer in the case of developing into the SP ready-to-win effect than in the case of variable effect example 1 where the ready-to-win is not established. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, depending on the variable effect, the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative symbol 41 may be longer in the case where the ready-to-win is not established than in the case of developing into the SP ready-to-win effect. However, in the case of developing into SP ready-to-win performance, control is performed so that the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 becomes longer with a higher probability than in the case of not establishing ready-to-win. In other words, control is performed so that the temporary stop time of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is likely to be longer when the SP ready-to-win effect is developed than when the ready-to-win is not established.

In addition, in the variation production example 4, when the SP ready-to-win production is developed, the lighting production of the three decorative patterns 41 is always performed (100%), and when the SP ready-to-win production is not developed after the ready-to-win is established, the three Although it has been described that the decorative pattern 41 is not illuminated, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when it does not develop into the SP ready-to-win effect after establishment of the ready-to-win game, the lighting effect of the three decorative symbols 41 may be performed with a predetermined probability. Also, when the SP ready-to-win effect develops, the light emission effect of the three decorative patterns 41 may not be performed with a predetermined probability. However, control is performed so that the lighting performance of the three decorative patterns 41 is performed with a higher probability in the case where the SP ready-to-win performance is developed than in the case where the ready-to-win performance is not developed after establishment of the ready-to-win. In other words, control is performed so that the three decorative patterns 41 are more likely to emit light when the SP ready-to-win effect develops than when the ready-to-win game does not develop to the SP ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the light emitting effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is not performed when the ready-to-win state is not established as in the variable effect example 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ready-to-win state is not established. In this case, three decorative patterns 41 may be illuminated with a predetermined probability. However, control is performed so that the lighting effects of the three decorative patterns 41 are performed with a higher probability when the SP ready-to-win effect develops than when the ready-to-win is not established. In other words, the light emission effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is controlled to be more easily performed when the SP ready-to-win effect develops than when the ready-to-win is not established.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect when the number of reservations is 3 as in the variable effect example 1, the approaching display effect is not performed when the out-of-line decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped (0 %), but is not limited to this.
For example, in the variable effect when the number of reservations is 3, when the out-of-order decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, an approaching display effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, when the out-of-order decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the approaching display has a higher probability in the variable performance when the number of reservations is 0 than in the variable performance when the number of reservations is 3. Control to perform production. In other words, when the out-of-order decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, the variation effect when the number of reservations is 0 is more likely to cause the approaching display effect than the variation effect when the number of reservations is 3. Control to make it easy. That is, when the out-of-line decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, control is performed so that the approaching display effect is easier to perform as the number of suspensions during the variation effect is smaller.

[Modification 1]
Next, a modification of the example of the variable effect (example 2 of variable effect) described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 will be described.
FIGS. 44 and 45 are diagrams showing a modification (Modification 1) of the B mode as the performance mode in the high-probability time-saving gaming state of the variation production example 2. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 2 of variation presentation will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 of variation presentation may be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 44(1) to 44(3), after the decorative design 41 with low decorativeness starts to fluctuate, the left and right decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are aligned. Reach is established. When reach is established, the left and right fourth symbols 56 (in the illustrated example, the numeral "4") are also temporarily stopped.
Further, when reach is established, as shown in FIG. 44(4), as the ready-to-win circuit diagram effect, the number enlargement display effect and the separation effect are performed.

When the separation effect is performed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are reduced and displayed at the separation position, as shown in FIG. 44(5). Also, at this time, the numeric elements 411 and the numeric decorative elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in such a manner that part of them is cut off from the display area of the image display section 114 .
Subsequently, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden through the transition effect shown in FIG. 44(6).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44(7), an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed as an SP ready-to-win effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 44(8), a deviation suggestive image 62 is displayed. Also, at this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the middle fourth symbol 56 (the number "5" in the illustrated example) is temporarily stopped.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45(9), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 45(10), the decorative pattern 41 that is out of line is temporarily stopped. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before establishment of the ready-to-win state. Also, at this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 have returned from the separated position to the variation start position. Then, as shown in FIG. 45(11), the temporarily stopped misplaced decorative pattern 41 is illuminated, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. be done. In addition, the three fourth symbols 56 that have been temporarily stopped are also decided and stopped along with the decision stop of the misaligned decorative pattern 41 .

As described above, in the B mode as well, the distance effect may be performed as the ready-to-win season design effect. In addition, in B mode, when the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped after establishment of ready-to-win, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be returned from the separated position to the variation start position without performing the approaching display effect.

Moreover, when reach is established, the left and right fourth symbols 56 may be aligned and temporarily stopped. Further, three fourth symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped when the misaligned decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped.
In addition, the display mode of the fourth symbol 56 described above is not limited to the high probability time saving gaming state, and may be performed in the low probability time saving non-gaming state.

[Modification 2]
Next, a modification of the variable performance example (variation performance example 2) described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 and the variation performance example (variation performance example 4) described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43 will be described. .
FIG. 46 to FIG. 48 are diagrams showing a variable performance example of A mode as a performance mode in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state of variable performance example 2 and a modification (modification 2) of variable performance example 4. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 2 and example 4 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 and example 4 of variable effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 46(1) to 46(3), after the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 (shown in the figure) are temporarily stopped. In the example, the number "7") is aligned to establish a reach.
When reach is established, as shown in FIG. 46(4), the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other. Specifically, the left decorative design 41 moves to the right side of the display area of the image display section 114, and the right decorative design 41 moves to the left side of the display area of the image display section 114. . In other words, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward the middle decorative design 41 toward each other. As a result, the distance between the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 becomes shorter than before the reach is established. Also, at this time, a reach notification image 71 is displayed. This ready-to-win notification image 71 is an image for notifying which decorative symbols 41 are aligned to establish a ready-to-win, and in the illustrated example, it is an image with a message "7 tenpai!"

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46(5), a separation effect is performed, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 are such that the character element 413 is cut off from the display area of the image display section 114, as shown in FIG. 46(6). is displayed.
Subsequently, the middle decorative pattern 41 is variably displayed at a low speed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). After that, the decorative pattern 41 moves upward in the display area of the image display section 114 while shrinking as shown in FIG. 47(8) through the transition effect shown in FIG. 46(7). Specifically, left decorative design 41 moves to the upper left corner of the display area of image display section 114 , and right decorative design 41 moves to the upper right corner of the display area of image display section 114 . Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 is a decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness. At this time, the display of the SP ready-to-win pre-stage image 64 is performed as the SP ready-to-win effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47(9), an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed. Also, at this time, an effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is displayed, a cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 47(10).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47(11), an SPSP ready-to-win pre-stage image 66 is displayed as the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(12), the SPSP reach post-stage image 67 is displayed. Also, at this time, another effect button image 68 is displayed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes and becomes a mode similar to the other effect button image 68 .
If the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is displayed, it suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be lost, as shown in FIG. 47 (13). A third deviation suggestive image 72 is displayed. The third failure-indicating image 72 is an image indicating that the food eaten by the two characters (Kukkari Sabei and Yushichi the Windmill) was not delicious.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47(14), a transition effect is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(15), the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment is displayed in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 have returned from the separated position to the variation start position without performing the approaching display effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(16), the light emitting effect of the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 48(17), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is determined and stopped.

As described above, in the modification 2, when the ready-to-win state is established, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other. By doing so, it is possible to make a strong impression on the player as to which decorative symbols 41 are aligned to establish a ready-to-win.

In Modification 2, the character symbol enlargement display effect is not performed after the ready-to-win state is established, but the character symbol enlargement display effect may be performed after the ready-to-win state is established. In this case, the operation of moving the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 toward each other may be performed after the character design enlarged display effect is performed. Further, an operation may be performed in which the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other while the character design enlarged display effect is being performed. Further, the character design enlargement display effect may be performed after the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 move toward each other.

Further, it has been described that when the reach is established, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other, but the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not limited to this. For example, when the reach is established, at least one of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 may move closer to the other.

Further, even in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, an operation may be performed in which the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other after the reach is established. Furthermore, at this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, after the left and right decorative designs 41 are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 may move toward each other. Further, an operation may be performed in which the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other while the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 3]
Next, modifications of the example 2 of the variation effect and the example 4 of the variation effect will be described.
FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 are diagrams showing a variable performance example of A mode as a performance mode in a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state of variable performance example 2 and a variation (variation 3) of variable performance example 4. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 2 and example 4 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 and example 4 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and FIGS. 36(A-5) to 36(A-7) are performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(1), the special design 42 as one aspect of the middle decorative design 41 is changed at a low speed. This special symbol 42 is a symbol that, when stopped and displayed, confirms that it will develop into an SP ready-to-win effect. The special pattern 42 is moved so as to be seen on the front side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加Also, the special symbol 42 has a wider display area than the middle decorative symbol 41 (see FIG. 37(A-9)) which is enlarged and fluctuated after the ready-to-win state is established.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(2), when the special pattern 42 is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 49(3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(4), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 49(5), an SP ready-to-win pre-stage image 64 is displayed as an SP ready-to-win effect. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display section 114 in a display size smaller than the decorative pattern 41 before establishment of the ready-to-win state. Specifically, left decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of image display section 114 , and right decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of image display section 114 .
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(6), an SP ready-to-win effect image 61 is displayed, and an effect button image 63 is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 161 while the effect button image 63 is being displayed, a cut-in image 65 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(7).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(8), an SPSP ready-to-win pre-stage image 66 is displayed as an SPSP ready-to-win effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(9), the SPSP ready-to-win post-stage image 67 is displayed, and another effect button image 68 is displayed. Also, at this time, the effect button 161 protrudes into a mode similar to the other effect button image 68 . When the player operates the effect button 161 while another effect button image 68 is being displayed, the third loss suggesting image 72 is displayed as shown in FIG. 50(10).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50(11), a transition effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 50(12), the decorative pattern 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size before the character pattern enlarged display effect is performed. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 41 have returned from the separated position to the variation start position. Further, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the inner side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加Then, as shown in FIG. 50(13), after the luminescence effect of the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is performed, as shown in FIG. 50(14), the decorative pattern 41 of the missing eye is confirmed and stopped.

As described above, in this variable effect example, when the special symbol 42 is stopped and displayed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are hidden. Here, when the special pattern 42 is stop-displayed, the SP ready-to-win effect is developed after that, but the left and right decorative patterns 41 and the special patterns 42 displayed are not the same decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Therefore, when the player sees the displayed left and right decorative symbols 41 and the special symbols 42, there is a risk of erroneously recognizing that the misaligned decorative symbols 41 are displayed. Therefore, when the special pattern 42 is stop-displayed, the right and left decorative patterns 41 are hidden to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the misplaced decorative pattern 41 is displayed.

[Modification 4]
Next, a modification of example 2 of variation production and example 4 of variation production is explained.
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a variable performance example of the A mode as the performance mode in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state of the variable performance example 2 and a modification (variation 4) of the variable performance example 4. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 2 and example 4 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 and example 4 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4), FIGS. 36(A-5) to 36(A-7), FIGS. 41(1), 43(3), and 43 ( 8) The same effect as the effect described with reference to FIG. 43(11) is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(1), the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in a highly decorative manner. At this time, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size before the character pattern enlarged display effect is performed. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 41 have returned from the separated position to the variation start position. Further, the middle decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be seen on the inner side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加

Further, the misaligned decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, in the variable effect example 4, the missing decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped longer than the temporary stop time of the missing decorative symbols 41 shown in FIGS. 43(12) and 43(13).

Next, a resurrection performance will be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(2), the movable accessory 115 moves to the front side of the image display section 114 to cover a part of the image display section 114, and the revival presentation is performed. A resurrection effect image 73 indicating that the resurrection is being performed is displayed. This resurrection effect image 73 is an image showing that the food Sabei inadvertently ate was delicious. Further, as shown in FIG. 51(3), three decorative patterns 41 with high decorativeness are enlarged and displayed in combination of "444". Specifically, each of the doublet decorative patterns 41 is displayed in a display size larger than the display size of each of the left and right decorative patterns 41 enlarged and displayed by the character pattern enlarged display effect. At this time, a part of the left decorative pattern 41 and a part of the right decorative pattern 41 are overlapped on the back side of the middle decorative pattern 41, and the middle decorative pattern 41 is higher than the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41. A decorative pattern 41 of double eyes is displayed in a mode with a wide display area.
In addition, the resurrection effect is an effect that changes to a decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big hit after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost. is. In this resurrection effect, for example, after the decoration symbol "454" is temporarily stopped, "444" is displayed as the stop symbol.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(4), the decorative pattern 41 with double eyes is displayed in a reduced size. Specifically, the display size of each of the double-sided decorative patterns 41 has returned to the display size before the character pattern enlarged display effect was performed. Also, at this time, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other. As a result, the double-sided decorative pattern 41 returns to the variation start position.
Then, as shown in FIG. 51(5), after the light emitting effect of the temporarily stopped parallel decorative pattern 41 is performed, as shown in FIG. 51(6), the parallel decorative pattern 41 is confirmed and stopped. be done.

As described above, in the modification 4, the resurrection effect is performed after the decorative symbol 41 of the misalignment is temporarily stopped. Here, when the left and right decorative patterns 41 among the decorative patterns 41 of the misplaced line are displayed at the separated positions, the resurrection performance is not performed, and the left and right decorative patterns 41 of the decorative patterns 41 of the misplaced line are displayed at the fluctuation start positions. A resurrection effect is performed when it is displayed on. In other words, the resurrection performance is not performed until the left and right decorative symbols 41 out of the misaligned decorative symbols 41 move to the variation start position, and the resurrection performance is performed after the movement to the variation start position.

Here, if the resurrection effect is performed when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed at the separated position, when the out-of-order decorative pattern 41 is displayed at the fluctuation start position, the player can perform this fluctuation. In the production, it is determined that the resurrection production is not performed, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player is lowered. Therefore, after the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the fluctuation start position from the separated position, the resurrection effect is performed, so that the left and right decorative patterns 41 out of the misplaced decorative patterns 41 move to the fluctuation start position. Even so, the player is expected to perform the resurrection presentation.

In addition, in the modification 4, when the light emission effect of the three decorative symbols 41 is performed, the resurrection effect is not performed after that. On the other hand, when the resurrection effect is performed, the light emission effect of the three decorative patterns 41 is performed thereafter.
Further, in the fourth modification, the double decorative pattern 41 is returned to the variation start position. A stop may be made.

[Modification 5]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 5) of the character design enlarged display effect.
In the above description, as the character pattern enlarged display effect, the character element 413 in the left and right decorative patterns 41 is enlarged and displayed, and the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412 are not enlarged and displayed after the ready-to-win is established. Here, the aspect of enlarged display of the decorative pattern 41 by the character pattern enlarged display effect is not limited to the above example.

For example, reach is established as shown in FIG. 52(1), and then, as shown in FIG. may be enlarged and displayed. In other words, the display areas of the numeric elements 411, the numeric decorative elements 412, and the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be widened.
52(3), the numeral element 411 and the numeral decorative element 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed, and the character element 413 is not enlarged and displayed. good too. In other words, of the left and right decorative patterns 41, the display area of the numeric element 411 and the numeric decorative element 412 may be widened, and the display area of the character element 413 may not be widened.
Further, when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and then displayed in reduced size, the enlarged portion of the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in reduced size. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 41 do not have to be displayed in reduced size during the ready-to-win effect after being displayed in enlarged size.
Further, by displaying the left and right decorative patterns 41 in an enlarged manner, the distance between the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 may be shortened compared to before the ready-to-win state is established.

In the above description, in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state, the decorative design 41 with high decorativeness is used, and in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the example in which the decorative design 41 with low decorativeness is used has been described. , but not limited to. For example, in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness may be used. Also, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, a highly decorative decorative pattern 41 may be used. Further, when the character pattern enlarged display effect is performed for the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 used in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, any aspect of the character pattern enlarged display effect described above may be performed.
Further, when reach is established, the character element 413 may be more easily enlarged and displayed after establishment of reach in the low probability time saving non-game state than in the high probability time saving gaming state. Here, when the reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display the character element 413 in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state than in the high-probability time-saving non-playing state after the establishment of the reach. The character element 413 is always enlarged (100%) after the establishment of, and the character element 413 is not enlarged (0%) after the reach is established in the high-probability time-saving game state. In addition, when reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display the character element 413 in the low probability time-saving non-playing state than in the high probability time-saving non-playing state after the establishment of reach. After establishment, the character element 413 is enlarged with a predetermined probability, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is used and the character element 413 is not enlarged (0%). When the character element 413 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the number decoration element 412 may also be displayed in an enlarged manner, or may not be displayed in an enlarged manner.

Further, when reach is established, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 may be enlarged and displayed more easily in the low-probability time-saving no-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state after the establishment of the reach. Here, when reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display both the number element 411 and the character element 413 in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state after the establishment of the reach. In the non-playing state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are always enlarged (100%) after the ready-to-win state is established, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged after the ready-to-win state is established. Not displaying (0%) is also included. In addition, when reach is established, it is easier to enlarge and display both the number element 411 and the character element 413 in the low probability time-saving non-playing state than in the high probability time-saving gaming state after the reach is established. In the game state, both the number element 411 and the character element 413 are enlarged and displayed with a predetermined probability after the reach is established, and in the high probability time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is used and the number element 411 and the character element 413 are used. Both include not to enlarge the display (0%). When enlarging both the numeric element 411 and the character element 413, the numeric decoration element 412 may or may not be enlarged.

In addition, in the above description, when the reach is established, it is easier to perform the number enlargement display effect after the establishment of the reach in the high probability reduction in working hours gaming state than in the low probability reduction in working hours non-gaming state, but it is not limited to this. .
For example, when a ready-to-win state is established, the number enlargement display effect may be performed more easily in the low-probability time-saving no-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state after the ready-to-win state is established. Here, when the reach is established, it is easier to perform the number enlargement display effect after the establishment of the reach in the low probability reduction in working hours non-gaming state than in the high probability reduction in working hours gaming state. It also includes performing the number enlargement display effect without fail (100%) afterward, and not performing the number enlargement display effect (0%) after the reach is established in the high-probability time-saving game state.

Also, the character element 413 of the decorative pattern 41 may be regarded as a specific identification element. Furthermore, the numeric elements 411 and the character elements 413 in the decorative pattern 41 may be regarded as specific identifying elements.

[Modification 6]
FIGS. 53 and 54 are diagrams showing a modification (modification 6) of the ready-to-win frock production.
In the above description, in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state, after the ready-to-win state is established, the separation effect is performed while the character pattern enlarged display effect is performed, and then the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a reduced size. . Here, the timing of the character pattern enlarged display effect, the timing of the separation effect, and the timing of the reduced display of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not limited to the above examples.

For example, reach is established as shown in FIG. 53(1), then character pattern enlarged display effect is performed as shown in FIG. A performance may be performed. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 53(4), the left and right decorative patterns 41 may be displayed in reduced size.
Further, for example, after the ready-to-win state is established, as shown in FIG. 53(5), character pattern enlargement display effects are performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(6), left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in reduced size. may Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 53(7), a separation effect may be performed.

Also, for example, reach is established as shown in FIG. 54(8), after that, as shown in FIG. In addition, the separation effect may be performed while the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in reduced size.
Further, any aspect of Modification 6 may be performed for the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the timing at which it moves, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a reduced size after the reach is established in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

[Modification 7]
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a modification (modification 7) in which the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is displayed so as to be cut off from the display area of the image display section 114 .
In the above description, in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state, a part of the character element 413 of the left and right decorative pattern 41 is cut off from the display area of the image display unit 114 by performing the separation effect after the reach is established. explained that Here, the manner in which the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed so as to be cut off from the display area of the image display section 114 is not limited to the above example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55(1), of the left and right decorative patterns 41, part of the numeric decorative elements 412 are cut off from the display area of the image display section 114, and the character elements 413 and numeric elements 411 are displayed on the image display section. It may be displayed in a manner that cannot be seen from the display area of 114 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 55(2), part of the numeric elements 411, part of the numeric decorative elements 412, and part of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display section 114. It may be displayed in a manner that can be seen from the area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55(3), part of the numeric element 411 and part of the numeric decorative element 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are cut off from the display area of the image display section 114, and the character element 413 is It may be displayed in such a manner that it cannot be seen from the display area of the image display unit 114 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 54(4), part of the numeric decorative elements 412 and part of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are cut off from the display area of the image display section 114, and the numeric elements 411 are It may be displayed in a manner that cannot be seen from the display area.

Also, depending on the decorative pattern 41, the elements among the numeric elements 411, the numeric decorative elements 412, and the character elements 413 that can be seen from the display area of the image display section 114 may differ.
Further, the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 may differ in the elements that can be seen from the display area of the image display section 114 among the numeric elements 411, numeric decorative elements 412, and character elements 413. FIG. Further, the size of the area that can be seen from the display area of the image display section 114 may be different between the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 .

Even if the numerical elements 411 of the decorative pattern 41 are out of the display area of the image display section 114, half or more of the area occupied by the numerical elements 411 is within the display area of the image display section 114. Is displayed. Therefore, even if the numerical element 411 of the decorative symbols 41 is out of the display area of the image display unit 114, the player can recognize which symbols are aligned to establish a reach. However, half or more of the area occupied by the numeric elements 411 may be cut off from the display area of the image display section 114 .

[Modification 8]
Next, a modified example (modified example 8) of the display mode of the fourth pattern 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a modified example (modified example 8) of the display mode of the fourth pattern 56. As shown in FIG. In the following description, differences from Modification 1 will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as Modification 1 will be omitted.

First, the same effect as the effect described with reference to FIGS. 44(1) to 44(7) is performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(1), from the state in which the right and left fourth symbols 56 (both "4" in the illustrated example) are aligned and temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 56(2), The fourth pattern 56 moves at high speed, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize which fourth pattern 56 is displayed.
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56(3), the fourth pattern 56 returns to the original display area and is temporarily stopped. At this time, as the right and left fourth symbols 56, the fourth symbols 56 of "3" are temporarily stopped.

As described above, in this modified example, after the ready-to-win state is established, a change effect is performed in which the right and left symbols aligned in the temporarily stopped state are changed. Here, in the present embodiment, compared to the "4" pattern before the change, the "3" pattern after the change has a high probability of time saving after the end of the jackpot game when the result of the special pattern lottery is a big hit. There is a high probability that it will be in a game state.
Therefore, by performing the change performance of the left and right fourth symbols 56, it is further expected that the player will be in a high probability time-saving game state after the end of the big win game when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. can be made

In addition, the change effect of the fourth symbol described above is not limited to the high probability time saving gaming state, and may be performed in the low probability time saving non-gaming state.
Further, a change performance of the decorative pattern 41 may be performed. For example, an effect of changing left and right decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness shown in FIG. 38(A-3) may be performed.

[Modification 9]
Next, a modification of the example 2 of variation effect described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a variation example (variation example 9) of the variation presentation example of the A mode as the presentation mode in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state of the variation presentation example 2. FIG. In the following description, differences from example 2 of variation presentation will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 2 of variation presentation may be omitted.

First, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 35(A-1) to 35(A-4) and FIGS. 36(A-5) to 36(A-7) are performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), when the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed at the separated positions, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off, and then the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored and the game is played. When a command relating to power-on is transmitted from the control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 displays a power restoration in-progress image 75 on the image display unit 114 as shown in FIG. 57(2). More specifically, the image/sound control unit 310 that has received the power-on command from the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the image 75 during power restoration.

Then, the effect control unit 300 transmits a power restoration end command, which is a command indicating that the power restoration is completed, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power restoration image 75 was displayed. The image/sound control unit 310 that has received this power restoration end command causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative design 41 and the fourth design 56 (see FIG. 57(3)). The decorative pattern 41 and the fourth pattern 56 displayed at this time are initial patterns (default patterns) predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 and the fourth pattern 56 are displayed with the combination of "123".

Incidentally, the decoration pattern 41 displayed as a combination of "123" as the default pattern is determined regardless of the result of the previous pattern variation or the pattern variation being executed. In addition, the background image displayed in the background of the decorative pattern 41 displayed by the combination of "123" is also determined independently of the background image displayed when the previous pattern variation is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 57(3), when the decorative pattern 41 or the like is displayed and the special pattern is fluctuating, that is, when the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the special pattern fluctuation is completed. , the display of the decorative pattern 41 of the default pattern "123" is maintained until the fluctuation of the special pattern stops. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 does not execute the approaching display effect. Also, at this time, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the character pattern enlarged display effect. Also, at this time, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 on the image display section 114 have returned from the separated positions to the fluctuation start positions. That is, the left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the fluctuation start positions without performing the approaching display effect.

When the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost, the fact that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost is reported by continuing the display of the decorative pattern 41 of the default pattern "123". . Further, when the image/sound control unit 310 receives a customer waiting command from the effect control unit 300 after the special symbols stop changing, it executes the customer waiting effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the lottery result of the special design lottery is a big hit, the special design stops fluctuating and the decorative design 41 changes from the default design "123" to the jackpot special design lottery result. is switched to a combination for a big hit (for example, "111"). As a result, it is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Even in this case, the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 after switching returns to the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 before the character pattern enlarged display effect. Further, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 41 on the image display section 114 after switching have returned from the separated positions to the fluctuation start positions. In other words, the left and right decorative symbols 41 after switching are returned to the variation start position without performing the approaching display effect.

As described above, in this modified example, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off after the ready-to-win timing diagram production is performed, and then, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored, the approaching display production is performed. The left and right decorative patterns 41 return to the fluctuation start position without moving.
In the above description, the case where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and restored before the SP ready-to-win effect is performed after the ready-to-win has been established has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when reach is established and power supply shutdown and power restoration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are performed after the start of the SP reach effect, the same as described with reference to FIGS. 57(2) and 57(3) Image display may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the character element 413 of the decorative pattern 41 moves when the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, the character elements 413 of the three decorative patterns 41 may perform actions corresponding to the decorative patterns 41 respectively. Further, when reach is established, the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 and the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 may be operated. Further, after performing the enlarged display and the reduced display of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 described with reference to FIGS. 40A-9 and 40A-10, the light emission effect ))) is performed, the character element 413 of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 may be activated.
Further, the action performed when the character element 413 of the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, the action performed when it is temporarily stopped, the action performed when reach is established, and the action performed by the character element 413 of the double-sided decorative pattern 41 are Different operations may be performed, or the same operation may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 move toward each other as the approaching display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one of the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 may move toward the other, and the other may not move toward the other. may be regarded as an approaching display effect. Further, either one of the left decorative pattern 41 and the middle decorative pattern 41 may perform an action of moving toward the other, and this action may be regarded as an approaching display effect. Also, either one of the right decorative pattern 41 and the middle decorative pattern 41 may move toward the other, and this action may be regarded as an approaching display effect. That is, at least one of one of the three decorative designs 41 and the other design may move closer to the other.
In order for one decorative pattern 41 out of the three decorative patterns 41 to approach the other decorative patterns 41, at least one of the one decorative pattern 41 and the other decorative patterns 41 is enlarged and displayed. , the distance between the one decorative pattern 41 and the other decorative pattern 41 is also reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the character effect is performed when the resurrection effect is performed, but the condition for performing the character effect is not limited to the case where the resurrection effect is performed.
For example, the character effect may be performed when the cut-in image 65 is displayed, or the character effect may be performed when the big win suggestive image 69 or the second big win suggestive image 70 is displayed. . In this case, the character effect performed when the revival effect is performed, the character effect performed when the cut-in image 65 is displayed, and the big win suggestive image 69 and the second big win suggestive image 70 are displayed. The performance of the movable accessory 115 may be the performance in which the movable accessory 115 has the same action mode, or may be the performance in which the action mode is different.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the SP reach production is performed in the low probability time saving non-game state or after the SP reach production, and when the SP reach production is performed in the high probability time saving game state or after the SP reach production Although it has been explained that a production is performed, it is not limited to this.
For example, after the big win suggestive image 69 or the second big win suggestive image 70 is displayed, the transition effect may be performed immediately before or immediately after the double decorative pattern 41 is displayed.
Further, each transition effect may have the same effect mode, or may have different effect modes.

Moreover, although this Embodiment demonstrated that the special design 42 was displayed after the ready-to-win was established, it is not limited to this.
For example, the special symbol 42 may be stop-displayed after the right decorative symbol 41 different from the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, for example, when any one of the three decorative designs 41 is temporarily stopped and the other two decorative designs 41 are fluctuating, the special design 42 may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it was explained that the A mode as the production mode in the low probability time saving non-game state and the B mode as the production mode in the high probability time saving game state are provided, but limited to this not. For example, A mode and B mode may be provided according to the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 at the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern 41 (before establishment of reach) as the effect mode in the low-probability time-saving non-playing state. Further, for example, as the production mode in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, A mode and B mode may be provided according to the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 at the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern 41 (before reach establishment).

[Second embodiment]
[Production image]
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 , in the second embodiment, an effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300 . In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 include the decorative pattern 41, the moving image 51, the reserved image 52, the reserved number display 55, and the fourth pattern 56. FIG. The image display section 114 also displays a transition image 60, an effect button image 63, a right-handed image 87, an SP image 91, an SPSP image 93, an introductory image 94, an effect name notification image 95, a round number display image 96, and an ending image 97. , an end suggestive image 98, a variable probability mode end image 99, and an image 89 during power restoration may be displayed. Further, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a four-division effect is executed. Effect images displayed on the image display unit 114 in this 4-split effect include the decorative frame 81 , the reach line image 83 , and the development frame suggestion image 85 .
Each of the effect images described above will be described below. Although the effect images that overlap with the first embodiment will also be described here, the description of some of the effect images that overlap with the first embodiment may be omitted. .

[Decorative pattern 41]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), three decorative designs 41 are displayed on the image display section 114 . In addition, when the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 41", and the pattern on the right side. The pattern arranged in the 2 is sometimes called a "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41".

Decorative pattern 41 of the present embodiment is configured by combining a plurality of image elements. In this embodiment, as image elements that can form the decorative pattern 41, there are provided a numeral element 411 representing a numeral, a numeral decorative element 412 decorating the numeral element 411, and a character element 413 representing a character. Further, in the present embodiment, as part of the character element 413, an effect image (so-called aura) is displayed around the character.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, there are a mode with high decorativeness and a mode with low decorativeness. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(1), in the highly decorative display mode, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed with a numeric element 411, a numeric decorative element 412, and a character element 413. FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 64(1), for example, in a mode with low decorativeness, the character element 413 is not displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the number element 411 and the number decoration element 412. FIG. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to changes in the game state, progress of the production, or the like. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 in the display mode with low decorativeness is displayed in the performance executed in the high probability time-saving gaming state, the SP performance, and the four-division performance (described later), and the display mode with high decorativeness. The decorative pattern 41 is displayed in cases other than these.

In the variable rendering of the decorative patterns 41, the effect control unit 300 first causes the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the Chinese numeral "two") to be temporarily stopped after the three decorative patterns 41 are variably displayed by, for example, vertical scrolling. Next, the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the Chinese numeral "three") is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the Chinese numeral "one") is temporarily stopped. After passing through the state in which all the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in this manner, all the decorative patterns 41 are finally fixed and stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern. Incidentally, the combination "213" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, the decorative pattern 41 in which the three pieces are not aligned is sometimes called a misaligned decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁

It should be noted that although switching between two display modes of the decorative pattern 41 with high decorativeness and low decorativeness has been described here, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 may be switched in three or more modes. For further explanation, the display mode may be switched according to the size of the decorative pattern 41, for example. Specifically, it may have a plurality of low-decorative modes in which the character element 413 is not displayed as the decorative pattern 41 . Then, when the size of each decorative pattern is relatively small as in the 4-division production (described later), a display mode with lower decorativeness is adopted, and the size of the decorative pattern is relatively small like in the high-probability time-saving game state. If it is large, a more decorative display mode may be adopted.

[Variation image 51]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), the image display unit 114 displays that the special symbol is fluctuating (decorative symbol 41 is being fluctuated) by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A variation image 51 shown is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbols during the variable display of the special symbols. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion of the display area of the image display unit 114) at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears with the stop display. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variation image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation image 51 is based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example, by changing the display mode of the color, pattern, shape, etc. announcing or suggesting For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the variation image 51, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher the later in this order.

[Reserved image 52]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), the image display unit 114 displays the pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). That is, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
In addition, a holding base is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 in the illustrated example are displayed in different modes.

In addition, the pending image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as color based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process. Furthermore, it is set such that when the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process is a big hit, the color of the type with a higher degree of expectation is displayed than in the case of a loss. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher as the color goes later in this order.

Here, as described above, winning at the first starting port 121 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 due to the winning at the first starting port 121 . Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 52 are displayed side by side in the area on the right side of the variable image 51 in order from a position closer to the variable image 51 toward a position farther away, that is, from left to right. be.

Although a detailed description is omitted, even winning a prize at the second starting port 122 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 by winning a prize at the second starting port 122 .
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically configured in the same or similar form.

Further, in the following description, the maximum of four reserved images 52 displayed are "first reserved image 52", "second reserved image 52", and "third Reserved image 52" and "fourth reserved image 52".

[Pending number display 55]
As shown in FIG. 58(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 .

[4th pattern 56]
As shown in FIG. 34(1), the image display unit 114 displays a special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A fourth pattern 56 is displayed, which indicates that it is in the process of changing (the decorative pattern 41 is being displayed in a variable manner). The fourth symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300 and displayed in different modes according to the variation and stoppage of the special symbol.
In addition, when the three patterns constituting the fourth pattern 56 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left fourth pattern 56", and the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle fourth pattern 56". ”, and the symbol arranged on the right side may be called a “fourth right symbol 56 ”. Moreover, when collectively describing the left fourth pattern 56 and the right fourth pattern 56, they may be referred to as "left and right fourth patterns 56".

In the illustrated example, the fourth pattern 56 is three images each corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 and displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the image display section 114 . This fourth design 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative design 41 . Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the fourth pattern 56 may be displayed in a low decorative display mode. Only displayed in

The fourth pattern 56 is displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner indicating that the special pattern is fluctuating as the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is won. Then, the fourth symbol 56 stops along with the stop display of the special symbol. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped fourth symbol 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41 . To explain further, in the example of FIG. 58(1), as the fourth pattern 56, numbers corresponding to "213" of the decorative pattern 41 are displayed.

[Transition image 60]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(10), the image display section 114 displays a transition image 60 that suggests (informs) that the SP ready-to-win effect will be executed. Here, the transition image 60 is a predetermined image, but may be a monochrome image displayed over the entire display area of the image display section 114 . For example, by displaying a white image as the transition image 60 on the image display unit 114, a so-called whiteout may be performed. Also, a so-called blackout may be executed by displaying a black image as the transition image 60 on the image display unit 114 . Note that the decorative pattern 41 may be hidden when the transitional image 60 is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the SP reach executed after the transition.

[Button operation image 63]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(9), the image display unit 114 displays a button operation image 63, which is an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 161 (see FIG. 2(b)). . By displaying this button operation image 63 , the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161 .

[Right shot image 87]
As shown in FIG. 64(1), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed image 87 . This right hitting image 87 is an image for notifying the player that the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

[SP image 91]
As shown in FIG. 59-2(11), the image display unit 114 displays an SP image 91, which is an image indicating that the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed. This SP image 91 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

[SPSP image 93]
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (12), the image display unit 114 displays an SPSP image 93, which is an image indicating that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed. This SPSP image 93 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fights an enemy character.

[Introduction image 94]
As shown in FIG. 67(3), the image display section 114 displays an introductory image 94, which is an image for prompting whether or not a 4-split effect (described later) will be executed. In other words, the introductory image 94 is an image suggesting that the 4-split effect will be executed before the 4-split effect starts. The introductory image 94 in the illustrated example is a cross-shaped figure whose dimensions increase with the lapse of time, and is an image that forms a part of the decoration frame 81 to be described later. Additionally, the introductory image 94 has a shape reminiscent of the decorative frame 81 . It should be noted that the 4-division effect may not be executed after the introductory image 94 is displayed. That is, the introductory image 94 may be executed as a so-called fake.

[Production name notification image 95]
As shown in FIG. 68-1(2), the image display section 114 displays an effect name notification image 95, which is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. This effect name notification image 95 is displayed when the big win game is started, and informs the type of the big win game.

[Round image 96]
As shown in FIG. 68-1(3), the image display unit 114 displays a round image 96 which is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed in the jackpot game. .

[Ending image 97]
As shown in FIG. 68-1(5), the image display section 114 displays an ending image 97, which is an image for informing the player of the end of the jackpot game. This ending image 97 is displayed when the jackpot game is over, and suggests (informs) the player that the jackpot game is over. The ending image 97 in the illustrated example includes the name of the production mode to be set after the big win, and a character string of "enter the variable probability mode!!" This ending image 97 suggests (reports) that the game state after the jackpot is a high-probability time-saving game state. Also, this ending image 97 disappears when the ending time ends.

[End suggestion image 98]
As shown in FIG. 68-2 (9), the image display unit 114 displays an end suggestion image 98, which is an image for notifying the player that the timing for ending the high-probability time-saving gaming state is approaching. . This end suggestion image 98 is displayed together with the start of the variable display of the special symbols immediately before the high probability time saving gaming state ends. The ending suggesting image 98 in the illustrated example includes a character string "Last!!" suggesting that the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends as the changing special symbol is stopped and displayed. This end suggestive image 98 is hidden when the special symbol just before the high probability time saving gaming state ends is stopped and displayed.

[Probability change mode end image 99]
As shown in FIG. 68-2 (11), the image display unit 114 displays a probability variable mode end image 99, which is an image for notifying the player that the high probability time saving gaming state has ended. This probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed when the high probability time saving gaming state is terminated, that is, along with the stop of variation of the last special symbol. The variable probability mode end image 99 in the illustrated example is an image that ends the state in which the player is advantageous by hitting to the right, and urges the player to change the hitting force of the game ball and hit to the left. This probability variation mode end image 99 suggests (reports) that the gaming state in the next variation is a low probability time saving non-gaming state. In addition, this variable probability mode end image 99 is hidden after a predetermined time has passed since the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends.

[Image 89 during power restoration]
As shown in FIG. 69(3), which will be described later, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the image display section 114 displays a power restoration in-progress image 89 . The image 89 during power restoration is an image showing that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of restoration. This image 89 during power restoration is hidden after a predetermined time has passed since the pachinko gaming machine 100 was powered on.

[Example of production using decorative pattern 41]
In this embodiment, various effects are performed using the decorative pattern 41 performed in the image display section 114 . For example, examples of effects using the decorative pattern 41 include a ready-to-win stage effect, a ready-to-win time stamp effect, a stop time line effect, and a four-division effect. Each performance will be explained below.

[Reach provocation]
The ready-to-win effect is, as shown in FIG. 58(4), an effect to incite whether or not the ready-to-win effect is to be executed. Specifically, in the ready-to-win effect, after the left decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops, the scrolling right decorative pattern 41 decelerates, and the pattern that matches the pattern displayed as the left decorative pattern 41 stops. A production to incite whether to do it is executed. In addition, while the ready-to-win fan effect is executed in the decorative pattern 41, the ready-to-win fan effect is not executed in the fourth pattern 56.例文帳に追加

[Reach timepiece production]
As shown in FIG. 59-1(6), the ready-to-win stage drawing effect is an effect executed by the decorative pattern 41 when the ready-to-win effect is executed. To be more specific, in the ready-to-win stage design production, an effect using the decorative pattern 41 is executed, such as the character of the decorative pattern 41 moving when executing the ready-to-win production. The ready-to-win design effect includes, for example, changing the position of the area where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, changing the size of the decorative pattern 41, and the like. Specifically, there is an action in which the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 approach each other, and an action in which the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 become larger. In addition, as the ready-to-win stage design production, the color and shape of the effect image in the character element 413 of each decorative pattern 41 are changed, and the color and shape of the number decorative element 412 of each decorative pattern 41 are changed. It includes performing a production to do. In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 41 and the right decorative design 41 are moved away from each other. In addition, while the ready-to-win circuit design effect is executed in the decorative pattern 41, the ready-to-win circuit design effect is not executed in the fourth pattern 56. - 特許庁

[Stand-by drawing production]
The stop design effect is a effect executed by the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (13). More specifically, in the stop design effect, an effect is executed in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes, such as the character of the decorative pattern 41 moving when the game is temporarily stopped. The stop design effect includes, for example, changing the position of the area where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, changing the size of the decorative pattern 41, and the like. In addition, as the stoppage drawing production, the color and shape of the effect image are changed in the character element 413 of each decorative pattern 41, and the color and shape of the numeric decorative element 412 of each decorative pattern 41 are changed. includes performing a rendition that

[Four division production]
In the present embodiment, a four-division presentation is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(1), in the 4-division rendering, a predetermined area (for example, the central portion of the image display section 114) in the image display section 114 is divided into a plurality of sections. A decorative pattern 41 is displayed in each of the divided areas. At this time, three patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 are displayed in each area. Assuming that the three decorative patterns 41 displayed in each area are one set of decorative patterns 41, in the four-division performance, the decorative patterns 41 are variably displayed using a plurality of sets (for example, four sets) of the decorative patterns 41. is done.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(1), one set of decorative patterns 41 is displayed in the state where the 4-division effect is not executed, whereas as shown in FIG. A plurality of sets of decoration patterns 41 are displayed in the state where the 4-division performance is being executed. A surprise can be provided to the player by executing such a four-division performance. In addition, by executing the variable display for each of the plurality of sets of decorative symbols 41, the player can feel that the chance of aligning the symbols has increased, and the player can be provided with a so-called profitable feeling.

Here, the timing at which the 4-division performance is executed will be described. In the present embodiment, the 4-split effect is executed in accordance with the progress of the effect or changes in the game state. For example, the 4-division effect is executed according to the result of the lottery using the effect random number, which is one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25(a). Also, the 4-part split effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the 4-division production may be executed when the game state is switched from a high-probability time-saving gaming state (so-called right-handed state) to a low-probability time-saving no-game state. Specifically, when the game state is switched from the high-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the four-division performance may be executed without fail. Here, the execution ratio at which the 4-division production is executed is higher in the low-probability time-saving no-game state than in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, that is, the right-handed state. Note that the 4-division effect may be controlled so as not to be executed in a so-called right-handed state.

Now, in the 4-division effect, the decorative frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestion image 85 are displayed. The decoration frame 81, the reach line image 83, and the development frame suggestion image 85 will be described in order below.

[Decorative frame 81]
As shown in FIG. 61(1), a decoration frame 81 is displayed on the image display section 114 when the 4-division effect is executed. This decorative frame 81 can be regarded as an image that notifies that the 4-division effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 divides the central portion of the image display section 114, that is, the area where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed into four. Here, of the areas divided by the decorative frame 81, the upper left frame is the first frame 81A, the upper right frame is the second frame 81B, the lower left frame is the third frame 81C, and the lower right frame is the fourth frame 81D. do. Further, in the following description, the decorative designs 41 displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D are divided into the first set of decorative designs 41A, the second set of decorative designs 41B, the third set of decorative designs 41C, and the third set of decorative designs. It may be called the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D.

Here, in the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 has four frames, that is, the decorative frame 81 divides the area where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed into four, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the area in which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed may be divided into two or three, or divided into five or more. To explain further, here, it will be described that four sets of decorative patterns 41 are used for the four division effect, but two sets, three sets, or five or more sets of decorative patterns 41 may be used.

In the illustrated example, the decorative frame 81 includes orthogonal lines, but the form of the decorative frame 81 is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to divide the area for displaying each set of decorative patterns 41 . For example, it may be possible to color-code the area where each set of decorative patterns 41 is displayed. Alternatively, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns 41 may be displayed at different positions on the image display section 114 without dividing the area by the decorative frame 81 or the like.

Here, the color of the decorative frame 81 is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the decorative frame 81, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher the later in this order.

Also, as described above, the variable display is performed for each of the four sets of decorative symbols 41 . Then, the ready-to-win effect may be executed with the decorative pattern 41 of each set. Here, the number of groups in which the ready-to-win effect is executed among the four groups of decorative symbols 41 is set so as to change according to the degree of expectation. For example, it may be set such that the greater the number of pairs in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the higher the degree of expectation. Specifically, when the ready-to-win effect is executed with all four sets of decorative patterns 41, the expectation is higher than when the ready-to-win effect is executed with one set of decorative patterns 41. - 特許庁

In addition, the 4-division effect is a effect that is started before the ready-to-win effect is executed in the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁In other words, the decorative frame 81 is an image displayed before the ready-to-win effect is executed in the decorative pattern 41 . Note that unlike this example, the start timing of the 4-split effect and the display start timing of the decorative frame 81 may be after the ready-to-win effect is executed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the timing at which the decoration pattern 41 of each group temporarily stops or the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 of each group stops may be different for each group, or may be the same for all groups. good.

[Reach line image 83]
As shown in FIG. 62-1(4), the reach line image 83 is an image suggesting that the reach effect has been executed. To explain further, the reach line image 83 in the illustrated example suggests a set of decorative patterns 41 that have become a reach out of a plurality of sets of decorative patterns 41 displayed during execution of the 4-division effect.

Here, in the same game state (for example, low-probability time-saving no-game state), the decorative pattern 41 displayed when the 4-part split effect is being executed is displayed when the 4-part split effect is not being executed. The dimension of the decorative pattern 41 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative pattern 41.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the small decorative pattern 41, it can be assumed that it will be overlooked by the player. Therefore, the ready-to-win line image 83 is displayed in order to distinguish the set of decorative patterns 41 that are ready-to-win from the set of decorative patterns 41 that are not to be ready-to-win.

The ready-to-win line image 83 in the illustrated example is an image of a straight line crossing three decorative patterns 41, that is, a set of decorative patterns 41 in which the ready-to-win effect is executed. In other words, the reach line image 83 is an image additionally displayed on the decorative pattern 41 . In addition, the reach line image 83 is displayed in addition to the decorative pattern 41, and is different from the reach line image production in which the decorative pattern 41 itself is deformed.

Also, the reach line image 83 in the illustrated example is an image displayed within each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. Here, the reach line image 83 is explained as an image displayed when the 4-division effect is being executed, but it may of course be displayed when the 4-division effect is not being executed.

[Development framework suggestion image 85]
As shown in FIG. 62-1(5), the development frame suggestion image 85 indicates which frame is selected from the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D when the 4-split effect is being executed. It is an image that In the illustrated example, one of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D is selected, and the advanced frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in the selected frame. This development frame suggestion image 85 is an image that distinguishes the selected frame, that is, the selected set of decorative patterns 41 from the unselected sets of decorative patterns 41 . In the illustrated example, the frame selected in the 4-split screen, that is, the decoration pattern 41 of the set in which the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed is used to perform subsequent effects (in the illustrated example, the SP ready-to-win effect). be done.

[Variation production example 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variable effect example 1) will be specifically described. Variation production example 1 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 1 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 58(1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114. and Also, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays the decorative pattern 41 , the moving image 51 , the pending image 52 , the pending number display 55 , and the fourth pattern 56 . At this time, the first reserved image 52 is displayed. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "1", and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In this way, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 . Further, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Incidentally, when the drawing indicates that the decorative pattern 41 is being variably displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 41 is indicated by an arrow for easy understanding. In addition, the variable display is started in the fourth pattern 56 as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(3), the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. At this time, the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 performs an action. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the left decorative pattern 41 (the number "four") raises its right hand when temporarily stopped. In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark in the vicinity of the decorative pattern 41 for easy understanding.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(4), a ready-to-win effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed while displaying the same pattern (the number "four") as the left decorative pattern 41, and the performance prompts whether to temporarily stop at the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 41. to run.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(5), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolled at a low speed is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the right decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the number "five" which is a pattern that does not match the left decorative pattern 41.例文帳に追加That is, the reach eyes are not established. Also, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 performs an action when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 raises its right hand when temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(6), the middle decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and temporarily stops at the position fixed and stopped until the start of fluctuation. The character element 413 of the middle decorative pattern 41 performs an action when temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the character element 413 of the middle decorative pattern 41 raises its right hand when temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(7), after the three decorative patterns 41 continue to temporarily stop for a predetermined time (for example, one second), the three decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped along with the stop display of the special patterns. Here, the combination "425" of the decorative symbols 41 stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. At this time, the combination of the fourth pattern 56 is “425”, which matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

[Variation production example 2]
FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2. Variation production example 2 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time-saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 2 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In the following description, differences from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 59-1(1) to 59-1(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 41 starts from the state where the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114. Then, a reach-inducing effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(5), the right decorative pattern 41 scrolling at a low speed is temporarily stopped. At this time, the right decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped at the design of the numeral "four" which is the design matching the left decorative design 41.例文帳に追加That is, the ready-to-win effect is executed. Also, the character element 413 of the right decorative pattern 41 temporarily stops and performs an action.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (6), the ready-to-win costume drawing effect is executed. Specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are moved away from each other (see white arrows in the figure). Also, in the illustrated example, the character elements 413 in the highly decorative left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed. Note that the numeric elements 411 and the numeric decorative elements 412 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 are not enlarged and displayed even if reach is established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(7), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped while being separated from each other. Specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 continue to be temporarily stopped at positions moved to the left and right sides of the image display section 114, respectively. At this time, the display size of the character elements 413 of the left and right decorative patterns 41 returns to the display size before establishment of reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-1(8), the middle decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed and temporarily stops at the position fixed and stopped until the start of fluctuation. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is shifted to the front side of the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加Further, the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the pattern of the number "five" different from the left and right decorative patterns 41.例文帳に追加That is, an effect is executed as if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery was a loss.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(9), the effect button image 63 is displayed superimposed on the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern 41. FIG. By displaying the effect button image 63 in this way, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player who has once recognized that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery should have been obtained.
Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(10), a transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden when the transitional image 60 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(11), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 move to the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display section 114 . The left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a small display mode and have a low decorativeness. More specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed by numerical elements 411 and numerical decoration elements 412, respectively. Also, the middle decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. As a result, a large area for displaying the SP image 91 is secured. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2(12), the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (13), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while executing the stop design effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by a numeric element 411 , a numeric decorative element 412 and a character element 413 . Also, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in a combination of "454". In this way, by displaying the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "454", it is suggested (notified) to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (14), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114. FIG. Also, as the fourth symbol 56, "454" is displayed. In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the reduced pattern 57 are in a state of matching with the combination of "454". Incidentally, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a highly decorative manner. That is, as shown in FIG. 59-1(1), the decorative design 41 is displayed in a mode that coincides with the start of variation of the decorative design 41. FIG. As a result, the restart of the variation of the decorative pattern 41 becomes smooth.

[Variation production example 3]
FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2. Variation production example 3 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 3 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Note that this example 3 of variable effect is an example of effect corresponding to example 2 of variable effect. may omit the description.

First, as shown in FIGS. 60-1(1) to 60-1(4), the decorative pattern 41 starts to change from a state in which the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114. Then, a reach-inducing effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 60-1(5) to 60-2(12), the image display section 114 executes the ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (13), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while executing the stop design effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by a numeric element 411 , a numeric decorative element 412 and a character element 413 . Also, in the illustrated example, the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a combination of "444". Thus, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "four, four, four" suggests to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (14), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114. FIG. In addition, “444” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the display of the fourth pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "four four four". Incidentally, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a highly decorative manner.

[Variation production example 4]
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing one mode of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 4) will be specifically described. Variation production example 4 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 4 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, the variable effect example 4 is an example of a variable effect in which the four-part split effect is executed and the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Note that the timing at which the 4-division effect is started will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 61(1), the effect control unit 300 displays the decorative frame 81 in the image display unit 114, and the first set of decorative patterns 41A through 41D are displayed in the first frame 81A through the fourth frame 81D, respectively. A fourth set of decorative patterns 41D is displayed. At this time, each of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D is displayed in a mode of low decorativeness. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the numerical element 411 and the numerical decoration element 412 . Here, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are displayed in combinations of "156", "212", "213" and "646", respectively. That is, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are displayed in combinations of different patterns. In addition, “213” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the fourth pattern 56 and the display of the third set of decorative patterns 41C are matched in a combination of "2, 1, 3". In addition, the fourth pattern 56 is displayed with a pattern that matches a predetermined set of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. At this time, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D start to fluctuate all at once. To explain further, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed (scrolled) at high speed. In addition, the variable display is started in the fourth pattern 56 as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(3), the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D temporarily stop all at once. That is, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, the symbols forming the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are displayed in a pseudo-stopped state in which they sway slightly. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(4), along with the stop display of the special symbols, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are fixed and stopped. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are all executed to be fixed and stopped. In addition, “213” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the fourth pattern 56 and the display of the third set of decorative patterns 41C are matched in a combination of "2, 1, 3". In addition, the fourth pattern 56 is displayed with a pattern that matches a predetermined set of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D.

In addition, in variation production example 4 in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the four division production is being executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61(1), the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, that is, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a manner coinciding with the start of variation of the decorative patterns 41. FIG. As a result, the restart of the variation of the decorative pattern 41 becomes smooth.
In the illustrated example, the timing at which each of the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41A to 41D starts to fluctuate, the timing at which it temporarily stops, and the timing at which it finally stops coincide with each other. This simplifies the control of the decorative pattern 41 by the effect control section 300 .

[Variation production example 5]
FIG. 62-1 and FIG. 62-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 5) will be specifically described. Variation production example 5 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time-saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 5 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, the variable effect example 4 is an example of a variable effect in the case of executing the four-division effect and the ready-to-win effect. This example 5 of variable effect is an example of effect corresponding to example 4 of variable effect. may be omitted. In addition, in variation production example 5, the production that partly matches with variation production example 2 is executed. Therefore, in the following description, the description of points that match the example 2 of variation effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 62-1(1) and 62-1(2), the image display unit 114 displays the decorative frame 81 and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D. Fluctuation is started from the fixed stop state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(3), in each of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Here, out of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, reach stitches are established in the third set of decorative patterns 41C and the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D. In addition, the middle decorative symbols 41 of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D continue to be displayed in high speed fluctuation. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(4), among the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, the third set of decorative patterns 41C and the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D in which reach lines are established are reachable. A line image 83 is displayed. At this time, the middle decorative patterns 41 of the third set of decorative patterns 41C and the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D continue to be variably displayed at high speed. Further, among the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, the reach line image 83 is not displayed in the first set of decorative patterns 41A and the second set of decorative patterns 41B in which reach lines are not established, and the middle decoration is performed. The pattern 41 is temporarily stopped. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(5), a development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, and after prompting which one to select, the third frame 81C (the third set decorative pattern 41C) is displayed. ), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed. Here, the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in the third frame 81C (the third set decorative pattern 41C), so that subsequent effects are executed using the third frame 81C (the third set decorative pattern 41C). That is notified (suggested) to the player. Here, it is explained that one is selected from the four frames of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, that is, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D. It may be a mode in which one is selected from the third set of decorative designs 41C and the fourth set of decorative designs 41D in which the eyes are established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(6), a transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, as the transition image 60 is displayed, the decorative frame 81 and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are hidden. On the other hand, the display of the pending number display 55 and the fourth pattern 56 is maintained. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the variation of the decorative pattern 41 has ended, for example.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-1(7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display section 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left pattern and right pattern of the third set of decorative patterns 41C selected in FIG. be. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a small display mode and have a low decorativeness. More specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in larger dimensions than when displayed in the third frame 81C in FIG. 62-1(5). Also, the middle pattern of the third set of decorative patterns 41C is not displayed. As a result, a large area for displaying the SP image 91 is secured. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained. After the transition image 60 is hidden, the first set of decorative patterns 41A, the second set of decorative patterns 41B, and the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D other than the selected third set of decorative patterns 41C are hidden. state is maintained.

Then, the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 62-1(8). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while executing the stop design effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by a numeric element 411 , a numeric decorative element 412 and a character element 413 . Also, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in a combination of "454". Thus, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "four, five, four" suggests to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2 (10), the decorative frame 81 is displayed, and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are displayed in the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, respectively. . Here, each pattern displayed by the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D corresponds to each pattern before development shown in FIG. 62-1(5). That is, the same "456" as before the development is displayed as the first decorative pattern 41A, and the same "125" as before the development is displayed as the second decorative pattern 41B. In addition, as the third decorative pattern 41C, "454" is displayed corresponding to the reach numbers displayed before development. Also, as the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D, "three, one, three" is displayed corresponding to the reach number displayed before development. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62-2 (11), along with the stop display of the special symbols, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are fixed and stopped. Also, as the fourth symbol 56, "454" is displayed. In other words, the display of the fourth pattern 56 and the display of the third set of decorative patterns 41C are matched with the combination of "four-five-four".

In addition, in variation production example 5 in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the four division production is being executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 62-1(1), the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, that is, the decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a manner coinciding with the start of variation of the decorative patterns 41. FIG. As a result, the restart of the variation of the decorative pattern 41 becomes smooth.

Also, unlike the illustrated example, the special symbols are stopped and displayed without executing the 4-division effect. That is, as shown in FIG. When the final effect is executed, the player selects special symbols for the set of decorative symbols 41 that have not been selected (in the illustrated example, the first set of decorative patterns 41A, the second set of decorative patterns 41B, and the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D). cannot be confirmed when the display is stopped. On the other hand, since the player can confirm the set of decorative symbols 41 that were not selected in the illustrated example, the player's satisfaction with the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, in the variation production example 5, in the variation of one special pattern, the ready-to-win production is executed in the third set decorative pattern 41C and the fourth set decorative pattern 41D, while the other set of the decorative patterns 41 is the third set. The ready-to-win effect is not executed for the first set of decorative symbols 41A and the second set of decorative symbols 41B. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A and the second set of decorative symbols 41B are determined and stopped at a combination of the decorative symbols 41 that do not form reach stitches, that is, so-called loose stitches. That is, in the variation of one special symbol, after performing the ready-to-win effect, a special effect is executed in which the combination of the decorative symbols 41 that do not establish the ready-to-win numbers is confirmed and displayed.

[Variation production example 6]
FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 6) will be specifically described. Variation production example 6 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 6 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, the variable effect example 6 is an example of a variable effect in the case of executing the 4-division effect and the ready-to-win effect. This variable production example 6 is a production example corresponding to the above-described variable production example 5. In the following description, differences from the variable production example 5 will be mainly explained, and points that are the same as the variable production example 5 will be explained. may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 63-1(1) and 63-1(2), the image display unit 114 displays the decorative frame 81 and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D. Fluctuation is started from the fixed stop state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(3), the left and right decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in each of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D. Here, out of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, reach stitches are established in the second set of decorative patterns 41B to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D. In addition, the middle decorative symbols 41 of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D continue to be displayed in high speed fluctuation. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(4), among the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, the second set of decorative patterns 41B to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D in which reach stitches are established is reachable. A line image 83 is displayed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 of the second set of decorative patterns 41B to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D continues to be variably displayed at high speed. In addition, in the first set of decorative symbols 41A in which reach lines are not established, the reach line image 83 is not displayed, and the intermediate decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(5), the development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in order, and after prompting which frame to select, the third frame is displayed. A development frame suggestion image 85 is displayed superimposed on 81C (third set decorative pattern 41C).

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(6), a transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, as the transition image 60 is displayed, the decorative frame 81 and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1(7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display section 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left design and the right design of the third decorative design set 41C are displayed in the corners (upper left corner and upper right corner) of the image display area in the image display section 114 . Also, the middle pattern of the third set of decorative patterns 41C is not displayed. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 63-1(8). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a highly decorative manner while executing the stop design effect. Also, in the illustrated example, the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a combination of "444". Thus, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "four, four, four" suggests to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (10), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114. FIG. In addition, “444” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the display of the fourth pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "four four four". It should be noted that, unlike the variable effect example 5, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol 41 is executed without executing the four-division effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excitement of the player who is informed that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

[Variation production example 7]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variable effect example 7) will be specifically described. Variation production example 7 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Variation production example 7 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In the following description, differences from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 64(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the low-decorative decorative design 41 in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. It is assumed that there is It should be noted that a right-handed image 87 is displayed in the image display section 114 . In addition, the background is displayed on the image display unit 114 in a manner suggesting that the game is in a high-probability time-saving gaming state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 64(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(3), along with the stop display of the special symbols, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. Here, the combination "436" of the decorative symbols 41 stopped and displayed shown in FIG. 64(3) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. At this time, the combination of the fourth pattern 56 is “436”, which matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped without going through a temporary stop. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect by the decorative pattern 41 in a high probability time saving game state in which the variation time of the special pattern is short (for example, 2 seconds) as compared with the low probability time saving no game state.

[Variation production example 8]
FIG. 65-1 and FIG. 65-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 8) will be specifically described. Variation production example 8 is an example of variation production of decorative design 41 in high probability time saving game state. In addition, variation production example 8 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In addition, in the following description, the points different from example 7 of variation production will mainly be explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as example 7 of variation production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(3), the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(4), the ready-to-win effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 41 scrolls at a low speed while displaying the same pattern (the number "four") as the left decorative pattern 41, and the performance prompts whether to temporarily stop at the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 41. to run.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (5), the ready-to-win effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 41 that has been scrolled at a low speed is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of the fluctuation. At this time, the left and right decorative patterns 41 execute the ready-to-win circuit design effect. Specifically, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are enlarged and displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(6), a transition image 60 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden when the transitional image 60 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1(7), the SP image 91 is displayed on the image display section 114 after the transition image 60 is hidden. At this time, the left and right decorative designs 41 are displayed at the corners of the image display area in the image display section 114, and the middle decorative design 41 is not displayed. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, the SPSP image 93 is displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 65-1(8). At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a mode of low decorativeness while executing the stop design effect. That is, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed by the numerical element 411 and the numerical decoration element 412 . Also, in the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in a combination of "454". Thus, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "four, five, four" suggests to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (10), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114. FIG. Also, as the fourth symbol 56, "454" is displayed. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the display of the fourth pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "454". In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness. That is, as shown in FIG. 65-1(1), the decorative design 41 is displayed in a mode that coincides with the start of variation of the decorative design 41. FIG. As a result, the restart of the variation of the decorative pattern 41 becomes smooth.

[Variation production example 9]
FIGS. 66-1 and 66-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 9) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-1 and 66-2. Variation production example 9 is a variation production example of the decorative pattern 41 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. Variation production example 9 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. It should be noted that this example 9 of variable effect is an example of effect corresponding to example 8 of variable effect. may omit the description.

First, as shown in FIGS. 66-1(1) to 66-1(4), the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate from a state in which the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114. Then, a reach-inducing effect is executed.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 66-1(5) to 66-1(8), the image display unit 114 executes the ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66-2(9), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a mode of low decorativeness while executing the stop design effect. Also, in the illustrated example, the decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a combination of "444". Thus, the display of the decorative symbols 41 in the combination of "four, four, four" suggests to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (10), along with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. FIG. In addition, “444” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the display of the fourth pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "four four four". In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a mode with low decorativeness.

[Variation production example 10]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing one mode of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 10) will be specifically described. Here, the variable effect example 10 is an example of the effect executed at the start of the four-division effect. In addition, variation production example 10 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 10 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, the variable effect example 10 is an example of a variable effect in which the 4-division effect is executed and the ready-to-win effect is not executed. In the following description, differences from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(1), the effect control section 300 stops the highly decorative decorative design 41 in the image display section 114 as the fluctuation of the previous special design is completed. It is assumed that there is At this time, the 4-division performance is not executed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 67(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(3), the introduction image 94 is displayed by the effect control section 300. FIG. In other words, the display of the introductory image 94 suggests to the player that the 4-split presentation will be executed. Here, in the illustrated example, as the introductory image 94 is displayed, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the introductory image 94 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(4), the effect control section 300 hides the introductory image 94, displays the decorative frame 81, and displays the first set of decorative symbols in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are displayed. At this time, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are in a state of being variably displayed at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(5), the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D temporarily stop all at once. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(6), along with the stop display of the special symbols, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are fixed and stopped. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are all executed to be fixed and stopped. In addition, “213” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the fourth pattern 56 and the display of the third set of decorative patterns 41C are matched in a combination of "2, 1, 3".

[Variation production example 11]
FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 11) will be specifically described. Here, the variable effect example 11 is an example of the effect executed at the start of the four-division effect.

In addition, variation production example 11 is a low probability reduction of working hours non-game state (first low probability reduction of working hours non-game state) through high probability reduction of working hours gaming state again low probability of reduction of working hours non-gaming state (second low probability of reduction of working hours non-gaming state ) is an example of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 returning to . In addition, variation production example 11 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win in the first low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Furthermore, in the variation production example 11, it is a variation production example in which the four division production is executed in the second low-probability time-saving no-game state. In the following description, differences from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (1), by the effect control unit 300, with the end of the variation of the special symbol executed in the first low-probability time-saving non-gaming state, decoration in the image display unit 114 It is assumed that the decorative pattern 41 with high quality is fixed and stopped in the combination of "four four four". That is, it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. At this time, the 4-division performance is not executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(2), an effect name notification image 95 is displayed on the image display section 114 along with the start of the jackpot game. The production name notification image 95 in the illustrated example includes a character string of "SUPER Reform Bonus". At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed image 87 . Also, the decorative pattern 41 is not displayed in the image display section 114 . Similarly, the change image 51, the pending image 52, the pending number display 55, and the fourth pattern 56 are not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(3), the round image 96 is displayed on the image display section 114 as the big winning opening 125 (see FIG. 1) is opened. The illustrated round image 96 includes characters "Round 1" indicating that the round game currently being executed in the jackpot game is the first time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(4), when the final round of the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays "Final" indicating the current round game.
A round image 96 including the characters "Round" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(5), an ending image 97 is displayed on the image display section 114 after the final round ends. By displaying the ending image 97, it is suggested (notified) to the player that the jackpot game will end. In addition, by displaying the ending image 97, the effect mode (game state) after the big win is also suggested (notified). The ending image 97 in the illustrated example includes the name of the production mode to be set after the big win, and a character string of "enter the variable probability mode!!" Here, in the illustrated example, the game state after the jackpot game is a high probability time-saving game state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (6), with the end of the jackpot game, the game state shifts from the low probability time-saving non-game state to the high probability time-saving game state. At this time, the image display section 114 displays the combination "444" of the decorative symbols 41 that hit the jackpot. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a large display mode and a low decorative display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (7), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.
Then, as shown in FIG. 68-1(8), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the combination "156" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (9), the start of the variable display of the last special symbol in the high probability time-saving gaming state, that is, the number of lotteries J = 0 With the start of the variable display of the special symbol, Variation of the decorative pattern 41 is started. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a termination suggestion image 98 .
Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (10), three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped along with the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 stopped and displayed shown in FIG. In addition, the fourth symbol 56 is also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (11), the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed as the game state shifts from the high probability time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving non-gaming state. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 is hidden as the variable probability mode end image 99 is displayed. In addition, by displaying the variable probability mode end image 99, it is notified that the game state shifts to a low probability time saving non-game state. In addition, by displaying the variable probability mode end image 99, it is informed that the four-division effect is to be executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (12), the effect control unit 300 hides the variable probability mode end image 99, displays the decorative frame 81, and displays the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D. 1st set of decorative designs 41A to 4th set of decorative designs 41D are displayed. At this time, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are in a state of being variably displayed at high speed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (13), the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are temporarily stopped. At this time, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D temporarily stop all at once. In addition, in the fourth pattern 56, the state in which three patterns are variably displayed is maintained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 68-2 (14), along with the stop display of the special symbols, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are confirmed and stopped. At this time, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are all executed to be fixed and stopped. In addition, “213” is displayed as the fourth pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the fourth pattern 56 and the display of the third set of decorative patterns 41C are matched in a combination of "2, 1, 3".

[Variation production example 12]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 12) will be specifically described. Here, the variable effect example 12 is an example of the effect in the case where the power supply is cut off and restored while the four-division effect is being executed. In addition, variation production example 12 is an example of variation production of the decorative pattern 41 in the low probability time saving non-gaming state. In addition, variation production example 12 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In the following description, differences from example 4 of variation presentation will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 4 of variation presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIGS. 69(1) and 69(2), the image display section 114 displays the decorative frame 81 and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, each of which is confirmed and stopped. The change starts from the state where

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off and restored, and a command relating to power-on is transmitted from the game control section 200, the effect control section 300 displays the image display section 114. An image 89 during power restoration is displayed. More specifically, the image/sound control unit 310 that has received the power-on command from the effect control unit 300 causes the image display unit 114 to display the image 89 during power restoration.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), the effect control unit 300, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after displaying the image 89 during power restoration, is a command indicating that the power restoration has ended. Send a power recovery end command. The image/sound control unit 310 that has received this power restoration end command causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative pattern 41, the fourth pattern 56, and the like. It should be noted that, at this time, unlike before the power restoration, the 4-division presentation is not executed. The decorative pattern 41 and the fourth pattern 56 to be displayed are initial patterns (default patterns) predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored. In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 41 and the fourth pattern 56 are displayed with the combination of "123".

As described above, when the power supply is restored in a state where the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in a variable manner in the 4-split effect, the 4-split effect is not executed after the power restoration image 89 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 41 is set to 1. displayed in pairs. In other words, the execution of the 4-part split effect is reset when the power supply is restored. In other words, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 changes as the power supply is restored.

[Variation production example 13]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 (variation effect example 13) will be specifically described. Here, the variation production example 12 is an example of production when the power supply is cut off and restored in the high probability time saving game state. In addition, variation production example 12 is an example of variation production when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In addition, in the following description, the points different from example 7 of variation production will mainly be explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as example 7 of variation production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display unit 114. It is assumed that there is
Then, as shown in FIG. 70(2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (3), when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored and a command relating to power-on is transmitted from the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300 displays an image during power restoration on the image display unit 114. Display 89.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (4), the effect control unit 300, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the image 89 during power restoration is displayed, is a command indicating that the power restoration has ended. Send a power recovery end command. The image/sound control unit 310 that has received this power restoration end command causes the image display unit 114 to display the decorative pattern 41, the fourth pattern 56, and the like. At this time, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the same manner as before the power restoration. Also, the 4-part split effect is not executed. Also, the decorative pattern 41 and the fourth pattern 56 to be displayed are initial patterns predetermined to be displayed when the power is restored.

As described above, when the power is restored in a state in which the low-decorative decorative pattern 41 is fluctuatingly displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the low-decorative decorative pattern 41 is set to 1 after the power-restoring image 89 is displayed. displayed in pairs. In other words, even when the power is restored, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is maintained.

[Relationship of production 1]
Here, the relationship of the variable performances in the variable performance example 5 and the variable performance example 7 will be described. Comparing example 5 of the variable effect shown in FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2 with example 7 of variable effect shown in FIG. For example, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable effect example 5 is, as shown in FIG. After passing through the effect of displaying 85, the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect by the third set decorative pattern 41C, the special pattern is stopped and fixed (see FIG. 62-2 (11)). On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 in the variable effect example 5 is fixed and stopped without going through a temporary stop (see FIG. 64 (3)). Therefore, when comparing the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the example 5 of the variable effect and the decorative pattern 41 in the example 7 of the variable effect, the time during which the three symbols to be fixed and stopped are displayed together is longer in the example 5 of the variable effect. . To explain further, when comparing the case where the 4-split effect is executed and the case where it is in the high probability time-saving gaming state, the 3 patterns that are fixed and stopped are aligned when the 4-split effect is executed. Display time is long. In this way, by lengthening the time in which the three patterns are displayed together, the time for the player to confirm each set of the plurality of decorative patterns 41 displayed by executing the four-division performance is ensured. be able to.

The time during which the three patterns are displayed together is the total time of the temporary stop time and the fixed stop time of the decorative pattern 41. Either one or the other may be used. Here, the time during which the three symbols are displayed together is the time from when the three symbols of the decorative symbols 41 to be fixed and stopped are temporarily stopped until they are fixed and stopped. To explain further, during the time when the three symbols are displayed together, the display of each of the three symbols is not switched to another symbol.

In addition, the state in which the three patterns of the second set of decorative patterns 41B in the variable effect example 5 are aligned is the state in which the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped and the three patterns are aligned as shown in FIG. 62-1(4). After that, it can be regarded as continuing during the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect by the third set decorative pattern 41C. In addition, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the example 5 of the variation effect can be understood as executing a so-called falling out, in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

In addition, unlike the description of the variable effect example 7 shown in FIG. 64, as a variable effect example of the decorative design 41 in the high probability time saving game state, there is also a mode in which the decorative design 41 is temporarily stopped and then fixedly stopped. Comparing this mode with the second set of decorative symbols 41B in example 5 of variable effect, the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop is longer in example 5 of variable effect. To explain further, in the case where the 4-part split effect is executed in the low probability time-saving no-game state and the case where it is in the high probability time-saving game state, the 4-part split effect is executed in the low probability time-saving no-game state. The time from temporary stop of the three symbols to final stop is longer in the case where the symbols are present.

Here, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable effect example 5 is a high-probability time-saving game state, and the three symbols are temporarily stopped than when a so-called falling out in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed is executed. It takes a long time from start to finish to stop. In addition, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable performance example 5 is fixed after the three symbols are temporarily stopped than in the case of the high probability time-saving game state and the SP reach performance and SPSP reach performance are executed. It takes a long time to stop.

Further, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the example 5 of the variable production and the decorative pattern 41 in the example 7 of the variable production can be regarded as having different display modes of the respective symbols. To explain further, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect example 7 can be regarded as different display modes of decorativeness mainly based on identification characters. Further, even if the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the example 5 of the variable effect and the decorative pattern 41 in the example 7 of the variable effect have the same number, it can be understood that the arrangement of the symbols is different. Here, the array refers to the position of the area where each image is displayed in the image display section 114 . Note that the array is not limited to the positions of the regions in the image display unit 114, but includes the dimensions and positional relationships of the regions in which each image is displayed.

In addition, in the illustrated example, the second set of decorative patterns 41B in the variable production example 5 and the decorative pattern 41 in the variable production example 7 are the same numbers in the first mode (normal mode 1, low probability). state, non-time-saving state, etc.) and the second mode (normal mode 2, high-precision state, time-saving state, 4-division effect execution mode, etc.) can be regarded as an example of a different aspect of the arrangement of displaying the decorative pattern 41. can.

Further, the shaking time, which is the time during which the three symbols to be fixed and stopped are displayed together, is longer in the variation rendering example 5 than in the variation rendering example 7. - 特許庁On the other hand, the degree of expectation is lower in example 5 of variable performance than in example 7 of variable performance. That is, when the second mode is used as in example 7 of variable performance, the time to display a plurality of performance symbols in a visually recognizable manner is longer than when the first mode is used as in example 5 of variable performance. is short, and the expectation of a big hit is high. By adopting such a configuration, in the game production, the excitement of the game is enhanced by lengthening the swing fluctuation time, and depending on the situation, the degree of expectation increases even if the swing fluctuation time is short. can provide surprise and enjoyment to

[Relationship of production 2]
Next, the relationship of the variable performances in the variable performance example 4 and the variable performance example 8 will be described. Comparing the variation production example 4 shown in FIG. 61 with the variation production example 8 shown in FIG. 65-1 and FIG. At 8, a ready-to-win effect is executed. To explain further, when comparing the case where the 4-division production is executed and the case where the high probability time-saving game state is performed, the probability that the reach fanning production is executed when the 4-division production is executed is low. It should be noted that the low probability of execution of the ready-to-win excitement effect when the four-division effect is being executed includes that the ready-to-win excitement effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. In addition, the high probability of execution of the ready-to-win production in the high-probability time-saving gaming state includes that the ready-to-reach production is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

In addition, in the example 4 of variation production, the ready-to-win circuit diagram production is not executed, but in the example 8 of variation production, the ready-to-win circuit diagram production is executed. To explain further, when comparing the case where the 4-split production is executed and the case where the high probability time-saving gaming state is performed, the reach time diagram production is executed when the 4-division production is executed. less likely to It should be noted that the low probability of execution of the ready-to-win state drawing effect when the four division effect is being executed includes the fact that the ready-to-win state state drawing effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. In addition, the high probability that the ready-to-win timing diagram production in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is executed includes that the ready-to-win timing diagram production is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Here, if the 4-division production is being executed, even if the ready-to-win swing production or the ready-to-win timing drawing production is executed, the production effect obtained when the 4-division production is not being executed is not obtained. do not have. Therefore, the control by the performance control unit 300 can be simplified by not executing the ready-to-win fanning performance or the ready-to-win stage drawing performance (or by reducing the execution probability) when the four-division performance is being executed.

It should be noted that the execution probability here indicates the rate at which the target effect is executed, and is not limited to a specific probability. For example, it may be the ratio of the number of production patterns in which the target production is executed to the total number of all production patterns executed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 . Further, for example, the performance performed in the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be observed a predetermined number of times, and the ratio of the number of times the target performance is performed to the predetermined number of times may be used.

In addition, in the case of executing the reach fanning production and reach time plan production in the high probability time saving game state, it is special after the reach is established than when the reach fanning production and reach time plan production are executed in the four-division production. A game can be easily executed.

In addition, the ready-to-win effect can be performed by applying an effect to the decorative pattern 41, making the display time of the decorative pattern 41 longer than other display times, or sliding down a pattern other than the ready-to-win pattern. (For example, NEXT pattern, pseudo-continuous pattern, continuous effect pattern) is produced to stop, etc. It can be regarded as a production that incites whether or not it will be a reach.

In addition, in the first mode (high-probability time-saving game state), the ratio of the advantageous hit (jackpot that becomes a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game) is the ratio of the disadvantageous hit (jackpot that becomes a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game). The special effect may be more successful with a higher winning symbol than with an advantageous winning symbol.

In addition, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first display mode (a mode with high decorativeness), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the second display mode compared to the case where the special effect (the ready-to-win fan effect or the ready-to-win frock pattern effect) is executed. It is easier to perform a special game when a special effect is executed when displayed in the second mode (for example, refer to the decorative pattern 41 of the variable effect example 4) of the display modes (modes with low decorativeness). good too. Further, when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed in the first display mode, the decorative pattern 41 is the first mode (for example, It may be difficult to perform a special game when the special effect becomes a reach success when displayed in the decorative pattern 41 of the variable effect example 8).

In addition, in a state where each decorative pattern 41 fluctuates at high speed before the ready-to-win state is established, that is, before the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and the decorative pattern 41 is difficult to see, the first mode (see, for example, the decorative pattern 41 of the variation effect example 8) is the first. The movable accessory 115 may be easier to operate than two modes (see, for example, the decorative pattern 41 of the variable effect example 4).

In addition, in the first mode (high probability time-saving gaming state), the possibility of not achieving reach success by performing reach fanning production may be higher than in the second mode (low probability time-saving no-game state). In addition, in the first mode (high-probability time-saving gaming state), the possibility that the ready-to-win stimulus effect is performed and the ready-to-win success is not achieved may be higher than the possibility that the ready-to-win stimulus effect is performed and the ready-to-win success is achieved. In addition, the probability of performing a special game is higher in the first mode (high probability time-saving gaming state) than in the second mode (low-probability time-saving non-playing state) good too. In addition, the probability of performing a special game is higher in the second mode (low probability time-saving no-game state) than in the first mode (high-probability time-saving gaming state) good too.

[Relationship of production 3]
Next, the relationship between the variable performances in the variable performance example 1 and the variable performance example 5 will be described. When comparing the variation production example 1 shown in FIG. 58 and the variation production example 5 shown in FIGS. 62-1 and 62-2, both are low-probability time-saving no-game states and are the same gaming state. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 in the variable production example 1 has high decorativeness, and the second set decorative pattern 41B in the variable production example 5 has low decorativeness. Further, both the variable effect example 1 and the variable effect example 5 are different in time when the three patterns in the decorative pattern 41 are displayed together. For example, the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable effect example 5 is, as shown in FIG. After the SP ready-to-win production and SPSP ready-to-win production by the third set decorative pattern 41C, it is determined and stopped with the stop display of the special pattern (see FIG. 62-2 (11)). On the other hand, the decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect example 1 is fixed and stopped without going through the SP ready-to-win effect after the three patterns are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 7) See). Therefore, when comparing the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable effect example 5 and the decorative pattern 41 in the variable effect example 1, the variable effect example 5 has a longer time during which the three symbols to be confirmed and stopped are displayed together. . To explain further, when comparing the second set of decorative symbols 41B in the variable performance example 5 and the decorative symbols 41 in the variable performance example 1, the time from the temporary stop of the three symbols to the fixed stop is the variable performance. Example 5 is longer. In this way, the time for which the three symbols are displayed together becomes longer, so that the player can confirm each set of the decorative symbols 41 which are displayed in the four-division performance. The time during which the three patterns are displayed together is the total time of the temporary stop time and the fixed stop time of the decorative pattern 41. Either one or the other may be used. Here, the time during which the three symbols are displayed together is the time from when the three symbols of the decorative symbols 41 to be fixed and stopped are temporarily stopped until they are fixed and stopped. To explain further, while the three symbols are displayed together, the state in which the three symbols are displayed is maintained, and the display is not switched to another symbol.

[Relationship of production 4]
Next, the relationship between the variable performances in the variable performance example 2 and the variable performance example 4 will be described. 59-1 and FIG. 59-2 are compared with the variation production example 4 shown in FIG. 61, both are low probability time saving non-game states and are the same game state. On the other hand, in the variable production example 4 shown in FIG. 61, the ready-to-win effect is not executed, but in the variable production example 2 shown in FIGS. Comparing the case where the 4-division performance is executed and the case where the 4-division performance is not executed, the possibility of executing the ready-to-win jolt performance is lower when the 4-division performance is executed. It should be noted that the low probability of execution of the ready-to-win excitement effect when the four-division effect is being executed includes that the ready-to-win excitement effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability that the ready-to-win excitement effect is executed includes that the ready-to-win excitement effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Further, in the variable production example 4, the ready-to-win circuit diagram production is not executed, but in the variable production example 2, the ready-to-win circuit diagram production is executed. To explain further, when comparing the case where the 4-division production is executed and the case where the 4-division production is not executed, the reach time diagram production is executed when the 4-division production is executed. less likely to be It should be noted that the low probability of execution of the ready-to-win state drawing effect when the four division effect is being executed includes the fact that the ready-to-win state state drawing effect is not executed, that is, the execution probability is 0%. Further, the high probability of execution of the ready-to-win state drawing effect when the four-part division effect is not executed includes that the ready-to-win state state drawing effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Here, if the 4-division production is being executed, even if the ready-to-win swing production or the ready-to-win timing drawing production is executed, the production effect obtained when the 4-division production is not being executed is not obtained. do not have. Therefore, control by the effect control unit 300 can be simplified by not executing the ready-to-win fanning effect or the ready-to-win stage drawing effect when the four-division effect is being executed.

[Relationship of production 5]
Next, the relationship between the variable effects in example 10 of variable effect and example 11 of variable effect will be described. Comparing the variable production example 10 shown in FIG. 67 with the variable production example 11 shown in FIG. 68-1 and FIG. is longer in example 11 of variation production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), compared with the time when the introduction image 94 is displayed without switching the game state in the low probability time saving non-gaming state, shown in FIG. 68-2 (11) Thus, the time during which the probability variation mode end image 99 is displayed when shifting from the high probability time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving non-gaming state is longer. 68-1 and 68-2, compared with the case where the decorative pattern 41 switches from a state of high decorativeness to a state of low decorativeness, as in example 10 of variation production shown in FIG. It is possible to further emphasize the effect executed while switching the effect patterns with low decorativeness like the variable effect example 11 shown in FIG. To explain further, by lengthening the display time of the variable probability mode end image 99, it is possible to stimulate the player by suggesting that the 4-division performance will give a surprise and a sense of profit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68-1 (6), the decorative pattern 41 displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a decorative pattern 41 (FIG. 67 (5) reference). In addition, the time (see FIG. 68-1 (5)) during which the ending image 97, which is an image that notifies that the high-probability time-saving gaming state is started, is displayed is an image that notifies that the four-division production is executed. is longer than the display time of the introductory image 94 (see FIG. 67(3)).

〔command〕
Although the description is omitted above, in order to electrically connect the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300, a cable (not shown) for transmitting control signals (commands), a game control board and the effect A connector provided on each of the control boards for receiving terminals of a cable (not shown) is used. Here, although the terminal of the cable is inserted into the connector, if the electrical connection between the cable and the connector is insufficient (so-called half-stabbing state), or between the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 The control signal transmitted by the game control unit 200 may be missed by the effect control unit 300 when an irregular event such as a communication error occurs. In other words, the effect control unit 300 may not be able to receive the control signal from the game control unit 200 when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

When the control signal is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 in this way, a different effect from the variable effect example described above may be executed. Specifically, for example, after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation stop command may not be transmitted from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 . In this case, as shown in FIG. 61(4), the first decorative pattern set 41A to the fourth decorative pattern set 41D are not fixed and stopped, and as shown in FIG. The state in which the symbols 41A to 41D are temporarily stopped continues. That is, when the variation stop command is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D temporarily stop than when the variation stop command is transmitted. the longer you stay. To explain further, the period during which the decorative pattern 41 swings becomes longer compared to the case where no control signal is missed.

In addition, the fluctuation stop command is not transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. When the production control unit 300 receives a command other than the fluctuation stop command such as the next fluctuation start command or the customer waiting command from the game control unit 200 in the state where the player is in, the production according to the received command is executed.

In addition, in the state where the above command is missed and the decorative pattern continues to swing, the fluctuation stop command accompanying the fluctuation of the special pattern after the fluctuation stop command originally received is issued. Upon reception, the effect control unit 300 fixes and stops the swinging decorative pattern 41 . In this case, the time from the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 41 to the final stop is longer than when no commands are missed.

Also, although the description has been omitted above, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the decorative pattern 41 and the fourth pattern 56 displayed after the power is restored are displayed without fluctuation or swing. To explain further, the decorative pattern 41 displayed after the power is restored is in a fixed and stopped state.

Originally, the effect control unit 300 maintains a state in which the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) upon receiving the fluctuation stop command. On the other hand, after the power is restored, the state in which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped is maintained beyond the predetermined time. That is, there is a case where the decorative pattern 41 is fixed and stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer.

Although the details will be described later, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 is updated each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. At this frame update timing, processing for drawing an image is executed. However, if a part of the processing that should be executed is not executed, that is, a processing failure occurs, the image continues until the next frame update timing. Is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61(3), the state in which the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped continues. To explain further, when a processing failure occurs, the time during which the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped becomes longer than when no processing failure occurs. In addition, the timing at which sounds such as music and voice are output from the speaker 156 does not change between the case where the above-described processing dropout occurs and the case where the processing dropout does not occur.

Also, in the above description, it has been explained that the character of the decorative pattern 41 moves when the decorative pattern 41 starts to fluctuate, stops fluctuating, or in the ready-to-win frock drawing effect. The action of the character executed at each of these timings may be different for each timing. Also, the action of the character may change according to the determination result of the preliminary determination. For example, a special action performed by a character may be more likely to be performed when the result of the pre-determination is a big win than when it is a loss. That is, the special action of the character may suggest that the result of the pre-determination is a big win.

Also, the four-part split effect may be executed according to the determination result of the preliminary determination. For example, when the result of the prior determination is a jackpot, the 4-division effect may be executed more easily (the execution ratio may be higher) than in the case of a loss. Here, the prior determination may be set so as not to be executed in a predetermined case (so-called prohibition rule). For example, when switching from a high probability time-saving gaming state to a low probability time-saving no-game state, or when the game state changes from a low probability time-saving gaming state to a low probability time-saving no-game state, prior determination is not executed. Here, as described in FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2 above, when switching from the high probability time-saving gaming state to the low probability time-saving non-gaming state, in order to maintain the player's interest, 4 division production can be set to always run. In such a setting, for example, when the 4-split effect is executed in a scene that does not involve switching the game state as shown in FIGS. Therefore, the degree of expectation for the four-division production is relatively high. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, when the 4-split effect is executed in a scene involving switching of the game state, the case where the 4-split effect is executed based on prior determination is not included, so the 4-split effect expectations are relatively low.

[Modification]
In the above description, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(3), in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped in the four-division rendering. However, it is not limited to this. That is, the changing first set of decorative symbols 41A to fourth set of decorative symbols 41D may be fixed and stopped without being temporarily stopped.

Further, in the above description, it was explained that the ready-to-win fan effect and the ready-to-win frock drawing effect are not executed when the four-part split effect is being executed. Either one or both of the ready-to-win stage presentation and the ready-to-reach timepiece presentation may be executed.

Further, in the above description, in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the four-division production, the first set of decorative symbols 41A to the fourth set of decorative symbols 41D are temporarily stopped all at once. It is not limited to this. For example, the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D may be temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, for example, in each of the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D, the left and right decorative patterns 41 may temporarily stop in order. After that, the development frame suggestion images 85 may be displayed in order in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D to prompt which one is selected.

Also, although the description is omitted above, the background of each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D in the four-division rendering may be different from each other, or may be configured by a common background. For example, one image such as one map may be formed from the backgrounds of the four frames, ie, the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D.

Further, although the description is omitted above, the fusuma image covering each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D may be displayed in the four-division rendering. For example, after an image is displayed in which the fusuma images are closed in each of the first frame 81A to the fourth frame 81D all at once, and the first set of decorative patterns 41A to the fourth set of decorative patterns 41D are covered with the fusuma images. Alternatively, only the fusuma image of the growing frame may be opened. In addition, such a fusuma image may be used in place of the development frame suggesting image 85 . In addition, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the fusuma image, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher as the color goes later in this order.

Further, in the above description, it has been described that the 4-part split effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, according to the result of the lottery using the production random number, which is one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG.

Here, when the 4-division performance is executed and the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a loss, the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed is fixed and stopped rather than the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed (3). The probability that the temporary stop time after one symbol is displayed may be long may be high. Here, the high probability that the temporary stop time will be long after the three symbols for final stop are displayed includes the fact that the temporary stop time will always be long, that is, the probability is 100%.

In addition, when the 4-division performance is executed and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed is better than the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed. execution probability may be high. Here, the execution probability of the stop drawing effect is high includes that the stop time drawing effect is always executed, that is, the execution probability is 100%.

Also, in the above description, various effect images are hidden. Here, instead of hiding the various effect images, for example, the color or transparency of the effect images may be changed to reduce the visibility.

In the above description, the decorative design 41 with high decorativeness includes the numeric element 411, the decorative numeric element 412, and the character element 413, and the decorative design 41 with low decorativeness includes the numeric element 411 and the decorative numeric element 412. Although the configuration has been described as having the character element 413 but not having the character element 413, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the highly decorative decorative pattern 41 may have an effect image element such as a so-called aura in addition to the numerical element 411, the numerical decorative element 412, and the character element 413. Further, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness may include a design such as a mark (for example, a hexagon) in addition to the numerical element 411 and the numerical decorative element 412 . It should be noted that the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness can be regarded as a display mode in which the number element 411 is the main component.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, each constituent member will be given a new reference numeral. That is, the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members in the first and second embodiments, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment described later.
(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper receiving tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower receiving tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later without being able to enter the upper receiving tray 11, and game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

The upper receiving tray 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper receiving tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 71) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 72) for detecting an operation to the production button 17, and a production button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 72) having a button driving motor for vertically moving the button 17 is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 72) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

A lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper receiving tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game balls. is performed, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper receiving tray 11 and the lower receiving tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper receiving tray 11 and guiding them to the lower receiving tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 72) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 72), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 72) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. It is By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner. A blowing port 15d is formed at the front end of the steering wheel light emitting device 15c to serve as a blowing port for blowing wind (air) from a blower device 21, which will be described later.

On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blower 21 for blowing out wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13. As shown in FIG. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for blowing out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower. ) passes through the base 14 of the shooting operation device 13 and the interior of the handle light emitting device 15c, and is delivered from the blower port 15d toward the player's hand. By activating the blower 21, it is possible to execute a blow effect in which wind (air) is sent out in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the shooting handle 15.例文帳に追加

The air blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the shooting operation device 13, but is provided around the decoration plate 2b of the outer frame 2 and the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4, etc., so as to blow air (air) toward the player. ) may be sent out. Also, a plurality of air blowers 21 may be provided.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The game ball shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 72) for driving the hitting member 28, and a shooting member 28 directed toward the lower left end of the game board. A shooting rail 29 that slopes upward and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a shooting position that is the lower end of the slope of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the game ball shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which a game ball can always win a prize (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 72), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are released from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). The balls are put out to the upper tray 11 as balls.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 72), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 72), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls to the upper tray. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Directly below the first starting port 45, a game ball from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 72), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second start port 47 between the closed state and the open state, and a second start port open/close solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 72) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is designed to be dispensed onto the upper receiving tray 11 . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal pattern gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 72), an opening/closing member 51 for changing (variable) between the closed state and the open state of the large winning opening 50, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls to the upper tray. 11 will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball flow path 52 (not shown) is provided for receiving and collecting game balls detected by the second starting opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a and allowing them to flow down.

Also, in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 72) is provided for detecting a game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a is used to re-detect game balls after being detected by the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the big winning opening detecting switch 50a. It is used to determine whether it was a proper winning (ball winning) or an abnormal winning (ball winning).

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, and a second special symbol display device. symbol hold indicator 64; A holding display device consisting of a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 72) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special A right-handed indicator 67 (see FIG. 72) is provided to prompt the game ball to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a during the game state) or during the time-saving game state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is used to display (notify) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is obtained by acquiring a random number for judging a big hit (judgment information) when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot lottery is obtained by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second start port 47, and acquiring the jackpot judgment random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. It should be noted that when the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), jackpot game (special game state) It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. A "jackpot game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45 (first special symbol It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol) is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when a jackpot lottery with a special pattern is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area formed smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. A movable effect member 73 imitating is provided.
In this embodiment, the "first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)" and the "second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)" may be collectively referred to as "image display device".

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) display various effects according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect executed when the special symbol is not variably displayed, a variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed when the special symbol is variably displayed, and a notice by the character. There are performances, etc.

In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), during the execution of the variable display of the production pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the board drive composed of solenoids, motors, etc. By moving with a device 75 (see FIG. 72), it is possible to perform a moving effect.

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located near the end (below) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the center (above) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) A movement effect is performed by moving (up, down) in the vertical direction between the effect position (second position) located at . The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

In addition, the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. By scrolling the displayed production design 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the production design 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronization with). That is, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

In the stop display of the performance symbol 70a, the performance symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big win lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a reach production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big winning lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the occurrence of a big win (special game state) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened.

Here, the ready-to-win effect means that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a for informing the big win is temporarily stopped, and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate, giving the player a sense of anticipation for winning the big win. It means variation mode. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are five types of ready-to-win effects, ie, "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", and "full-rotation ready-to-win effects".

"Normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a is displayed in the central area. It is a variable reach production.

"SP reach production" means that two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions, and the remaining one production pattern 70a is changed in the central region. , animation, etc.).

"SPSP reach effect" means that two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a is kept fluctuating in the central area, and the time is longer than the movie related to the SP reach effect (feature). It is a reach effect in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) flows.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In the present embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved (U1), which is the number of the current first reserved memory, is displayed. 1st pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2) which is the number of the current second pending storage Then, the icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display portions 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed on the display portions 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "second reserved number".

In the icon display area 70C, the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

The movable effect member 73 emits light by a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) during the execution of the variable display of the effect pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, and it is possible to perform a moving effect by moving with a board driving device 75 (see FIG. 72) composed of a solenoid, a motor, and the like.

Specifically, a light emission effect is performed by causing a plurality of lamps (such as LEDs) to emit light in a predetermined emission color in accordance with the progress of the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. In addition, a standby position (first position) located near the edge (upper side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a center side (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Movement production is performed by moving (up, down) in the vertical direction between the production position (second position). It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 17 may be configured to perform a light emission effect or a moving effect.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for putting out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island facilities, etc. A game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) that stores game balls to be supplied and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main controller 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game. ), a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and an effect control command from the main control board 110 A production control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production in response to and a power supply device 160A (not shown) incorporating a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 72) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has a chip microcomputer 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a large winning opening detecting switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RAM clear switch 55a, payout control board 120, etc. are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special Design reservation display 63, second special design reservation display 64, normal design reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, game information output terminal board 90, production control board 130, etc. are connected. It is Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing relating to the payout of game balls, thereby providing a game ball payout device. 100, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. etc. are connected, and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 .

When receiving a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control a predetermined number of game balls to be put out. When it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have been put out, control for putting out game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the display/audio control unit 140, the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, and the air blowing device 21, a board lighting device 74, a board driving device 75, etc., and a lamp/driving control unit 150, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to an input signal from the effect button detection switch 17a or the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/driving control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( output data or commands).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected to the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like; and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. a VRAM 147, an audio controller 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored, an input/output port and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 reads out the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143 in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (output data and commands).

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a drawing control command group, and an animation of a production pattern. An animation pattern for the purpose, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a performance design image, a background image constituting the background of the performance design. , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). , the drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it outputs to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

General-purpose controllers for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting them are provided between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device with XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/driving control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the production. Controls (outputs data and commands) are performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects in accordance with the received effect instruction commands and the like.

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, and the board lighting device 74 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/driving control section, and the effect control section 130m (sub CPU 130a ), based on the various performance data (including commands) transmitted from ), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the board lighting device 74 is performed to perform lighting effects, etc. Also, by controlling the drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and the board drive device 75, motion effects (the above-described movement effects) and the like are performed.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the production control board 130 and various electronic parts). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and a state related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time-saving game state” and “time-saving game state”.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “non-short-time gaming state” (2) A low-probability short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “short-time gaming state” (3) “ High probability game state "and" time saving game state "high probability time saving game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state ” will be called. In addition, in the present embodiment, "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because it is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. .

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" means that in the special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, A game state in which the winning probability is set as low as, for example, 1/299. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/59.8, for example. . Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed.

In this embodiment, the big hit that triggers the transition to the high probability game state is called "probability variable big hit". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal pattern hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average variation of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time-saving game state" and is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second start port 47 when the winning is won. say. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. /128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

(type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

In the present embodiment, "first jackpot", "second jackpot" and "third jackpot" are used as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45. It has "first big win" and "second big win" as the types of big wins that can be won in the big win lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加

"First jackpot" means that the first jackpot game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big prize mouth 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. It's a big hit. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

“Second jackpot” is a jackpot that executes a second jackpot game in which round games are executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" is a jackpot that executes the third jackpot game in which the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots are used, but the number of types is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three types. In addition, the opening time of the opening and closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any jackpot (first jackpot to third jackpot), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, and depending on the round game Different open times may be used.

(type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, there are "first win" and "second win" as types of wins that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44, and the winning lottery is executed. If the game state when the lottery is executed is the non-time-saving game state, it becomes "first win", and if the game state when the winning lottery is executed is the time-saving game state, it becomes "second win".

The "first win" is a win for executing the first winning game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second win" is a win to execute a second winning game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. . That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a prescribed number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can enjoy the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 .

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initialization processing in step S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, a boot program is read from the main ROM 110b and processing for initializing flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c is performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, in step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether power failure (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S20 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S41.

In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts. In step S42, the output port is cleared. In step S44, a process of turning ON a backup flag to be referred to when recovering from a power failure is performed. In step S45, a process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. Wait until it drips.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, a random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for judging a big win, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for determining a hit determination, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), special symbol special electric control for controlling the game state, and the like. process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a carries out normal pattern memory determination (hit determination, etc.), display control of normal symbols, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. .

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63 and A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol reservation display data to be output to the second special symbol reservation display 64 and normal symbol reservation display data to be output to the normal symbol reservation display 65 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 10 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (10 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. 1 is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered into the winning hole and updated (D←D+1) to determine whether the current game state is the special game state. determine whether When the current game state is the special game state, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the big winning opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1). , ends the big winning opening detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 76, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input processing is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the normal figure reservation number is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

If the number of reserved patterns is less than 4, add "1" to the number of reserved patterns and update the random number for determining the hit, the random value for determining the normal pattern, and the random value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, the vacant storage parts are sequentially retrieved from the first storage part in the normal symbol holding storage area, the acquired random number value is stored in the vacant storage part, and the gate detection switch input processing is completed.

The main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing in step S260. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52 or not. If the detection signal is not input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process is terminated.

When a detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the value of the winning ball counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D←D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) reaches the upper limit value ( For example, 20) and the lower limit (eg -10).

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) does not fall within the range between the upper limit and the lower limit, it is assumed that an abnormal winning (ball winning) has occurred, and an error designation command for abnormal winning is sent to the transmission data storage area for performance. External information data (output data) for outputting an abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the winning ball counter (D) is cleared, and a winning confirmation detection switch is set. End input processing. In addition, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning performs abnormal winning error notification to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and updates the counter. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D), which indicates the number of game balls entered (entered), and updated (D←D+1).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1), which is the number of first reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. . When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). A first special symbol memory specifying command corresponding to the number of symbol reservations (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires special symbol determination information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a special symbol, random number for determining a reach, random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern), and obtains the first special symbol. A vacant storage unit is sequentially searched from the first storage unit in the symbol reservation storage area, and the obtained special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage unit.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure variation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and this time ends the first starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first starting point winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that receives the first starting point winning designation command receives the first starting point winning. A designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice performance is performed over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning prize designated command. can be executed. Note that the pre-reading advance notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the movable effect member 73, and the lighting device 74 for the board.

In addition, regarding the second start opening detection switch input processing, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the first special symbol storage designation command, first pre-determination process, first starting opening winning designation command, respectively, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second special symbol reservation storage area, second reservation storage, second special symbol reservation number (U2), second 2 special symbol storage specification command, second pre-determining process, second start opening winning a prize specification command may be replaced.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data=0. Determination processing (step S310) If the processing is transferred to the special symbol change processing (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 special symbol stop processing (step S330), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340), if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing goes to the jackpot game end processing (step S350) Move.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. .

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing for determining a big hit, processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and processing for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, To determine whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0") determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed is the start of the customer waiting state is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, and the customer waiting state specifying command is set in the transmission data storage area for performance, and the special special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the special pattern memory determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. This time's special symbol memory determination processing is ended.

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, in the second special symbol reservation storage area Various random numbers (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the second corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number after subtraction (U2) 2 Set the special symbol memory specification command in the effect transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special design determination among various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage section to the 0th storage section of the second special design reservation storage area, and the current probability Based on the game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether it is a "jackpot" or a "losing" to execute a jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, in the first special symbol reservation storage area After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random values stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit, A first special symbol memory specification command corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) after subtraction is set in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, random numbers for special symbol determination out of various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability Based on the game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether it is a “jackpot” or a “losing” to execute a jackpot game.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit A special jackpot pattern or a losing special pattern is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot pattern, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a transmission data storage area for performance.

In addition, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage section is determined. A special pattern (big win special pattern, losing special pattern) is determined based on the random number value, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a performance transmission data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit Based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the determined variation pattern A corresponding variation pattern specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area.

In addition, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number and the random number for special figure variation, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area. .

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, data for lighting or extinguishing the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Variation display of the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is performed.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=0 is set to special symbol electric processing data=1, preparations are made to move to a subroutine of special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing for determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=1.

When the fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol determined in step S310 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 as a jackpot special symbol or a losing special symbol. , a predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the determination result of the big win determination.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=1 is set to special symbol electric processing data=2, preparations are made to move to a special symbol stop processing subroutine, and this special symbol variation processing is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). When the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of times of time saving > 0, the time saving number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the number of times of time saving = 0, the time saving game flag is cleared, and when the number of times of high probability > 0, it is high. The probability number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the high probability number=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special pattern, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set from special figure special electric processing data = 2 to special figure special electric processing data = 3 Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the current special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special pattern is lost, the special pattern special electric processing data is set to 0 from the special special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special design storage determination processing, and the special design stop processing of this time is performed. exit.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a selects the first jackpot game, second jackpot game, or third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stopped symbol data). A jackpot game process is performed.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (enter a ball) during this opening, or the opening time of the big winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), a large The drive data output of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped, and the opening/closing member 51 is closed. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game is completed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 16 times in this embodiment), the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 , the special figure special electric processing data is set to 4, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the jackpot game processing of this time is finished.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and also determines the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. A jackpot game ending process is performed.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special design (stop design data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the number of time saving Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the big hit game end processing of this time is completed.

(Description of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. 78 and 79 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

"First special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This first special symbol storage designation command is, when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases, the above step S230-11 or the above step S310 after the increase or decrease in the hold storage A first special symbol memory specifying command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This second special symbol storage designation command, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area increases or decreases, the above step S240 or the above step S310 to the number of reserved storage after increase or decrease A corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

"Production design designation command" indicates the type (kind) of the special design to be stopped and displayed. ” is set as “E2H”, and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. In addition, since the type of the special pattern ultimately determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends, the production pattern designation command can be said to indicate the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot ends. .

When various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbols is started, the performance symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbols is transmitted to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310. , and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"First special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 60, "MODE" is set to "E3H", various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern specifying command is the first special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 60 is started. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"Second special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol display device 61, "MODE" is set to "E4H", various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern specifying command is a second special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in step S310 when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 61 is started. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern specification command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" may be collectively referred to as "variation pattern specification command".

The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "00H".

This special symbol determination command is used when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the special symbol determination command is transmitted data for effect in the main RAM 110c in step S320. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol determination command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".

When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the main RAM 110c in the above step S400 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. , and will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "starting entrance winning designation command" is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance. " is set with "E6H", and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, "MODE" is set with "E7H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information. there is

This starting opening winning designation command, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the starting opening winning designation corresponding to the starting winning information in the above step S230-10 or S240 A command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "jackpot opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special game state) will start, "MODE" is set to "E8H", and DATA information is changed according to the type of jackpot game. is set.

As for this jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330, and step S800. will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

The "round specification command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

As for this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the output control process of step S800 is performed. will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in.

The "jackpot ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game.

As for the jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games end, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and step S800. will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

"Normal pattern storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storage stored in the normal number of reserved patterns (G1) storage area, "MODE" is set with "ECH", DATA according to the number of reserved storage information is set.

When the value stored in the normal design reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, this normal design storage designation command is normal design corresponding to the reservation storage number after increase or decrease in the above step S250 or step S400 A storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "general pattern designation command" indicates the type of normal design to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 62, "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the information of DATA is normally set according to the type of design. is set.

When various normal patterns are determined and variable display of the normal patterns is started, the general pattern designation command corresponding to the normal patterns is transmitted to the main RAM 110c in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. , and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"General pattern fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display device 62, "MODE" is set with "EEH", and information of DATA according to the fluctuation time of various normal patterns is set.

This general pattern fluctuation designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400 when the normal pattern fluctuation display is started. , is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

"Opening designation command for winning" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

As for this winning opening specifying command, when the auxiliary game is started, the winning opening specifying command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and in step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process.

"Ending specification command for winning" indicates that various auxiliary games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA information is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

As for this winning ending specifying command, when various auxiliary games end, the winning ending specifying command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and step It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether it is a time-saving game state or whether it is a high probability game state, and "MODE" is set to "F0H", and " DATA" is set.

This game state designation command is set to the game state at the time of starting the variation of the special symbols, at the end of the variation of the special symbols (at the start of the jackpot game), and at the end of the jackpot, in the steps S310, S330, and S350. A corresponding game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power-restoration designation command" indicate whether power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is "F1H". "DATA" is set to "00H" when the main RAM 110c is initialized, and "DATA" is set to "01H to 03H" when the main RAM 110c is not initialized.

The power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command correspond to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized in step S10, and the power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Alternatively, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed is set, and "MODE" is set to "F1H" and DATA is set to "04H". ing.

This customer waiting state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S310 when the customer waiting state where the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and is set in the output control process of step S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, and "MODE" is set to "F2H", and "DATA" information is set according to the error type.

This error designation command is issued when it is determined that a magnetic or radio wave abnormality has occurred in the magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process of step S600, or when an abnormal winning has occurred in the winning confirmation detection switch input process of step S260. , When it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred in the big winning opening detection switch input process of step S220 or the second start opening detection switch input process of step S240, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the main RAM 110c. and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the payout abnormality, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted to the payout RAM 121c for effect. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120 .

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set to "F2H", and information of "DATA" is set according to the type of error that has been resolved. is set.

This error cancellation designation command corresponds to the type of error that has been resolved when the payout control board 120 detects the closing of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the resolution of the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the resolution of the payout abnormality. A corresponding error cancellation designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120 .

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing a timer interruption process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if the power-on designation command has been received, a process for performing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the power-on sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for performing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), A power restoration sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and when a customer waiting state designation command has been received, a customer waiting effect is produced after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Do the processing to do. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140, and a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received, and if received, the second stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 1 special design reservation number, second special design reservation number, normal design reservation number, etc. are updated.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect processing in step E500. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a start-point winning designation command or variation pattern designation command is received, and if received, a process relating to icon change effects is performed.

The icon change effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. Details will be described later, but the timing of change and the mode of change (normal change, pattern effect change, and character effect change) Action change) is set in multiple types. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design decision command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command, etc. is received, and processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command if received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, whether the general pattern designation command, general pattern variation designation command, normal pattern determination command, opening designation command for winning, and ending designation command for winning, etc. are received It determines whether or not, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when it is received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Icon change effect processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute an icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the already displayed icon (the pending icon and the icon), and ends the current icon change rendering process. do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a starting entry winning designation command. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the executable period of the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-4, and if it is not during the executable period of the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

The period during which the icon change effect can be executed is when the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. Further, conditions different from the above three conditions may be used.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all of the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation (pre-reservation storage corresponding to the previously received start-up winning designation command) are normal reach or less, that is, all the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation are normally fluctuating, Decide whether it is shortened variation or normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 84) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, and selects one of the plurality of final icon display modes based on the starting point winning designation command and the random number value for determining the icon display mode. to determine the final display mode of one icon.

In step E510-8, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-10, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 85) for determining a change scenario for icon change effects. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 85, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of icons and the selection rate.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed as the first icon. It is displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed as the first image. It is displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a predetermined sound effect is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the precedence suspension are equal to or less than the normal reach. Alternatively, the icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension is not to perform the ready-to-win performance, and the icon change performance may not be executed when the ready-to-win performance is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) in the case where there is no ready-to-win effect than in the case where the ready-to-win effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the type of start-point winning designation command, the random number for determining the icon display mode, and the final icon display mode to be selected, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. Random numbers for determining the icon display mode are assigned so that

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game will be played). icon is set.

The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win. .

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the content of the effect. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the specific starting winning information indicating that the production content is SP reach or SPSP reach, it is determined that the production content is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. The character icon is selected at a higher rate than in the case of the normal starting prize information shown.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 84, the CD icon is not selected as the final icon display mode in the case of a big win, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the starting point winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be selected. , as a reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode in the changes are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is the variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. That is, "the variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the icon display mode is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon display mode update processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon display mode update processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing icon display mode update processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E520-1, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern specification command has been received. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-reading information storage area of sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). determine whether If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 87) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 according to the change timing corresponding to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. Then, the display mode of the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E520-7, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-8, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode updating process is terminated.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 88 and 89) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-9. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 88 or FIG. 89, a plurality of the One icon change pattern is determined from the icon change patterns.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the change timing corresponding to the icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing are transmitted. Then, the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the type of pending icon change pattern to be selected. As a reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the pending icon in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern (special pattern) indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the change notification pattern is used as a starting point to act on the reserved icon. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which an effect effect is performed to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the change stage of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode that is one step higher, and a jackpot icon. A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
88 and 89 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. FIG. 89 is a table referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot icon. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Pseudo-continuous effect is as if multiple times of variable display of the effect pattern is executed for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was done, within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47), all production It is a variable display of a performance symbol in a special mode in which a re-variation display in which the symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts to vary again is performed once or more times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relationship of change effect occurrence frequency between pending icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the appearance frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. ing.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. getting low.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received. It can be said that the display mode of is likely to change to the blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. getting higher.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. getting low.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the holding icon is more effective than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is likely to change to a red character icon. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) and the pending icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the reserved icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of winning, and a normal change pattern 01.
Also, the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation frequency is the relationship as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is better than the predetermined command Since the frequency of the change effect of changing to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning a big win than the frame update timing according to the reception of the is high, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect of changing to the blue character icon than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs earlier. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so that the player can pay attention to the subsequent variation performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the changing effect generation frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect generation timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect has the relationship as described above, the pending icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to draw out the expectations of the players for the jackpot game over a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 90(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the changing effect occurrence frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing has the relationship as described above, the icon is likely to change in the late period of the change effect, so the game It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by drawing the expectation of the player to the big winning game until the time when the variation presentation is late.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon occurs (changes))
FIG. 90(d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. A second generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when an icon is generated (changed). A third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of change), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon change. is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, when the CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in any manner. You may make it output. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit 141)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 .

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step T3, and refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 in step T4 to determine whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m. If it is not received, the process proceeds to step T7, and if it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command. Perform animation pattern setting processing.

The production instruction commands include a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group includes the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are specified (specified) information such as parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a variable production animation such as a background or character. , a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation for a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the frame (to draw a new effect image). If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process, which will be described later, a drawing control command is set according to the content of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is transferred to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are displayed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9. When outputting a new sound, It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP). Output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. may be stopped or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated in a loop.

(Command Reception Interrupt Processing of Integrated Control Unit 141)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the command reception interruption process of the integrated control section 141, and the command reception interruption process is executed by receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control section 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit 141)
V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, display of one frame of effect image from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends (1/30 It is executed each time (1/30th of a second = approximately 33 ms) a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received.

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP), frame buffer switching instruction processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 .

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms). will switch alternately.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of the change effect at the time of winning)
94 and 95 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal change period in which the normal change of the effect pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45 .

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generated notification sound is generated from the voice output device 9. output does not start.

Also, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effects images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. be.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. be.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Also, drawing of the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer. display is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound start with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, while the output of the second generated notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the blue character icon was erased and the second generated notification sound was output. Since this is done at a frame update timing different from the stop of , the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of change production at the time of winning)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an effect example in the case of displaying (changing to) a blue character icon the display mode of the first pending icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in a state in which the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which no pending memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, icon change effect determination processing is executed, and a change scenario is performed. Suppose that "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed with a blue character icon when winning a prize) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 96(b), in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45, the first pending icon (blue character The icon) H11 is displayed, and the second notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96(c), a combination (here, "234") indicating that the performance symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is not displayed is stopped and displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(d), the effect pattern 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(e), while the production pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable presentation. The same applies to FIGS. 99, 102, 103, 106, and 107 below.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
97 and 98 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon. Chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 to change the first pending icon to a blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 generates the second sound. The output of the notification sound does not start either.

Also, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the stop effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effects images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues. .

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues. .

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, dynamic effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound start with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, while the output of the second generated notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the blue character icon was erased and the second generated notification sound was output. Since this is done at a frame update timing different from the stop of , the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (at the time of shift).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, , and the stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed in the second display portion 70B2 is changed and displayed to a blue character icon when shifted and displayed in the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(c), a stop display is performed with a combination (here, "164") indicating that the performance symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(d), the performance symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(e), the production pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character effect change pattern 01)
100 and 101 are timings showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon. Chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice The output of the third generated notification sound from the output device 9 also does not start.

At timing T2, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (character display). not started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen e (character display). is continued.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen f (character display). is continued.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device. be.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn to the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display), and the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, dynamic effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer. image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data l (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the third generated notification sound in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon was erased and the third generated notification sound was output. Since this is performed at a frame update timing different from that of stopping the output, the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character effect change pattern 01) during variable effects.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), when the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, when no pending memory is stored, the production pattern 70a is variably displayed. A normal variation effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 102(b)), the character C1 throws a kiss and directs the heart H to the icon (CD icon) TH. A performance to fly is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(a), while the production pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 103(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a big win, and the combination ( Here, "222") is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 103(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size, and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of pattern action change pattern 01)
104 and 105 show various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a red character icon, but no change pattern or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 , the output of the third generated notification sound does not start either.

Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is rendered to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been displayed on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period during which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (variation pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. No output is started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (variation pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence is notified from the voice output device 9. Sound output starts. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the temporary stop effect display screen i (changing pattern & red character icon display). output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer. image, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data l (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the temporary stop effect display screen k (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the third generated notification sound in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon was erased and the third generated notification sound was output. Since this is performed at a frame update timing different from that of stopping the output, the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Production example of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the suspended icon is changed to a red character icon (symbol effect change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 106(a), in a state in which the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal fluctuation for variably displaying the effect symbol 70a A performance is running.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(b), "2" is displayed in the left variable display area, "3" is displayed in the right variable display area, and "change" effect symbol 70a is stopped in the central variable display area (temporary display). (stopped display), an effect like a lightning bolt appears from the changing pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the central variable display area toward the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1, When hit, the display mode of the first pending icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(c), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(a), while the production pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 107(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a big win, and the combination ( Here, "222") is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 107(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size, and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m executes the change production at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command (starting entrance winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the increase in variations of the change effect makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start-up winning designation command, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and scenario, but the method is not limited to this. . For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time it becomes possible to change the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon). In addition, when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting entrance winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes depends on the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) can be changed. may be determined each time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four display modes of the icons (the relevant icon and the pending icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. Although there are types, the number is not limited to four types, and may be more or less.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided that suggests that the likelihood of winning a big win is lower than that of the blue character icon and that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (after receiving the variation pattern designation command It is desirable not to change to a special icon in a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing). By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) are easily changed to a display mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Since the change to a special icon does not occur in the change effect that occurs in the game), it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed, increase the variation of the icon display mode, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is in the order of (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon It should be made higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01, whenever the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 and the changing pattern are displayed but are not changed (so-called fake effect). When such a fake effect is provided, the fake effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command). has a higher execution ratio than the change effect at the time of winning and the fake effect for the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), or normal change pattern 02, character action change It is desirable to be able to execute only the ghost effect for the pattern 01 and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but may be executed multiple times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so the normal change The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed multiple times. By doing so, there is a possibility that the display mode of the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is determined by a predetermined command (starting win designation Although the frame update timing is set to be two frames after the number of frames in which the command or variation pattern specification command) is received, it is not limited to two frames later. It can be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 was not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the change pattern designation command, but the timing is not limited to this timing. You may make it perform a change production|presentation in the frame update timing according to reception of a design memory designation|designated command and the production|presentation design designation|designated command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when executing "normal change pattern 02", "character action change pattern 01", and "symbol action change pattern 01", at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command Although the change effect is executed, the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command, without being limited to this timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect for informing that the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such effects, and in addition to outputting an icon generation (change) notification sound, the board lighting device 74 and/or the frame lighting device 10 can be used to display the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon). The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, similar to the output of the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, at the frame update timing when the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) At the same time (synchronously), the lamps of the board lighting device 74 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may start emitting light. Alternatively, the processing may be terminated in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing for erasing the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). good too.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (change effect occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be made unexecutable. By doing so, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short change time, so that the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the , By limiting the execution of the pattern action change pattern 01 (variation effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command), the game characteristics of the first specific game state and the second specific game state are improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without spoiling it.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the suspended icon or the icon itself, but is not limited to such a change. Without changing the mode (with the CD icon remaining), a color effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or around the icon, or around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed on the icon, or a character image suggesting an effect scheduled to be executed (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-run") may be displayed around (near) the pending icon or the icon. may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether the big win is won or lost, but the change scenario may be determined with reference to the big win. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current pending number, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). .

In this way, when determining the change scenario with reference to the hit or drop of the jackpot, if you win the jackpot and change to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2". In the case of 3" and "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario in which the icon changes to the red character icon when winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you have won a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the red character icon It can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which it is difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the character icon changes to a red character because it is a loss, the change scenario is that the red character icon changes to the red character icon when the prize is won rather than the case where the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes. should be set to a selection rate (%) at which is difficult to select.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when determining the pending icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot. may Specifically, based on the mode of change of the pending icon in this variable effect, the current number of pending, the hit and drop of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%), one pending icon is selected from a plurality of pending icon change patterns. A change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the pending icon change pattern with reference to the current pending number and the hit or loss of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current pending number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that the "normal change pattern 01" is more likely to be selected as the reserved icon change pattern when the icon change pattern is "3" or "4" than when the icon change pattern is "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the pending icon change pattern is better when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4" can be said to be the selection rate (%) at which "normal change pattern 01" is difficult to be selected.
In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, the pending icon change pattern is "normal change pattern 01" rather than when the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon. ” is set to a selection rate (%) that makes it difficult to select.

As described above, when changing to a red character icon in the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), the current pending number is "1". or "2", the expectation for winning the jackpot is higher than that for "3" or "2".

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. Here, description of the same parts as in the third embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109(a), a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It differs from the third embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

Also, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), and the current number It is also different from the third embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the 2 special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

Incidentally, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F corresponds to the first pending information, the first pending icon display area The first pending icon displayed in 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is the execution information. corresponds to

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
108 to 40, a specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 109(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound is the notification sound when the icon is generated. output is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decreasing display of the first reserved number, and the changing display (decreasing display) of the first reserved icon to the icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(e), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TH, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the variable display in the center Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the central variable display area. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is a state is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the non-animated increase display of the reserved number and the reserved icon is the shortest one frame. Since the game ends in a period (time), it is possible to shift immediately to a variable presentation (decrease display of reserved numbers and change display of reserved icons) without being slowed down, thereby improving interest in the game.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is output until the timing (frame update) after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends. Since the game continues, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols is reduced (changed from "1" to "0"), the display of the number of reserved numbers decreased by non-animation and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the display of the decrease in the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), the special symbol is reserved. While directing that the numbers change, the reserved number makes it easier for the player to grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increased display of the reserved icon with non-animation, rather than the increased display of the reserved number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, the degree of freedom of display control can be improved, and the fact that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased can be grasped at an early stage, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
111 to 42, a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described. FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 112(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first hold number and the increment display of the first hold icon with animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1, and enlarged display is started. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increase display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can know that the number of reserved special symbols has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol pending changes. While directing this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved number of special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable performance, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing of the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), so the number of special symbol pending The increase can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 113 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 114(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ing. Also, "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first reserved number, the change display of the first reserved icon to the icon by animation, and the reduction by the animation of the first reserved icon Display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". . In addition, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number is started, but since the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and notification when the icon occurs The output of the generated notification sound, which is a sound, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the first pending icon are finished. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the first reserved icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the image is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the change display of the reserved icon to the icon and the decrease display of the reserved icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Since the increasing display of the pending number is started even before the timing, the player can be made to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the changing display and decreasing display of the pending icon. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special pattern holdings increases during the execution of the change display of the holding icon to the icon and the decreasing display of the holding icon, the increase display of the holding icon and the output of the generated notification sound are put on standby (restricted). At the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so it is difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol holds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

Also, at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), the change of the hold icon It is also possible to start the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display and the decreased display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pending symbols increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby (limited ), the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 115 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 116(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area move to the upper left of the screen. start moving and zooming out.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the central variable display area are scrolled. The effect pattern 70a displayed is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the increment display of the first pending icon at this timing and when the icon occurs The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not it is a big win) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. ("777") that indicates a big hit, temporarily stop (become in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Finally, the performance symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the performance symbol 70a, "777". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of the end of this specific effect (frame update), the number of reserved numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect is completed (reduced display At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the reserved icon is started, so it is possible to prevent the transition of the special pattern reserved number from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special symbols increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the display of the increased number of reserved numbers is executed, and the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
117 to 49, a specific example when the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 117 is a timing chart showing that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(a), "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TH is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated Output of the generation notification sound is not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas (becomes in a swaying state), A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and during the "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and the predetermined advantageous period, The number of times the executed jackpot game is displayed as "jackpot x 1". Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(e), on the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls won (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reserved number, the change display of the second reserved icon to the icon by animation, the reduced display by animation of the second reserved icon, Non-animated return display of the first suspended icon and non-animated increase display of the first suspended icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(g), in the first image display device 70, the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second pending icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display portion 70D1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4. The second pending icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the .

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design). In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the second pending icon are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(h), in the first image display device 70, the second pending icon H21 moved from the first display section 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the second reserved icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the central variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first reserved number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first reservation icon occurs at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update). is started, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before is overlooked, the increase of the first special pattern reserved number can be recognized, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation completed in one frame, special symbol reservation Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special symbol at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases during the specific game state, while executing the increased display of the reserved number, the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

In addition, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during execution of the specific effect. , the icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but set on the second image display device 71 ( display), or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbols reserved by the lighting color of the LED.

[Technical features of the present invention]
◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; Effect control means (for example, effect control unit 300) that controls the effect according to the determination by the determination means, the first mode (for example, low probability time-saving no-game state) and the second mode (for example, high probability time-saving game state ) and a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200), and the effect control means is a first pattern that can be displayed in the first area of the display means based on the establishment of the start condition (for example , left decorative pattern 41) and a second pattern (for example, right decorative pattern 41) that can be displayed in the second area (for example, three decorative patterns 41). In the variable display for varying the plurality of symbols, some of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) are displayed, and the other symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbols 41) continue to vary. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) to perform, and in the pattern display effect, when performing the predetermined effect, the plurality of patterns (for example, three decorative patterns 41) are removed. 37 (A-9) is temporarily stopped as a misaligned decorative pattern 41), and the temporarily stopped first pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 37 (A-9)) and the second pattern ( For example, at least one of the right decorative patterns 41) in FIG. 37(A-9) approaches the other (for example, an approaching display effect in FIG. 37(A-10)) can be performed. When the missing symbols are temporarily stopped afterward, the second mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (B-1) to (B-4), FIGS. 36 (B-5) to (B-8), and FIG. 37 ( B-9) to (B-12) than the first mode (for example, FIG. 35 (A-1) to (A-4), Figure 36 (A-5) to (A-8), and low probability time-saving non-game state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 37 (A-9) to (A-11) is performed) is better, It is characterized by being easy to perform production.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to switch depending on the game state whether or not to perform an effect that makes the player pay attention to the winning pattern, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the effect using the decorative pattern. can.

◆ The second configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; An effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) that controls an effect according to the determination by the determination means, and the effect control means can be displayed in the first area on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition. A plurality of patterns (for example, three decorative patterns 41) including a first pattern (for example, left decorative pattern 41) and a second pattern (for example, right decorative pattern 41) that can be displayed in the second area are controlled to be displayed. In the variable display in which a pattern display effect is performed and the plurality of patterns are varied, some patterns (for example, left and right decorative patterns 41) of the plurality of patterns are displayed, and other patterns (for example, middle decorative patterns) are displayed. 41) It is possible to perform a predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that continues the fluctuation, and in the symbol display effect, if the predetermined effect is performed, it suggests that the special game is likely to be performed. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect in FIG. 43 (8)), and when performing the predetermined effect, the plurality of patterns (for example, three decorative patterns 41) are removed. 42 (5) is temporarily stopped as a misaligned decorative pattern 41), and the temporarily stopped first pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 42 (5)) and the second pattern (for example, FIG. 42 ( At least one of the right decorative patterns 41) of 5) can perform a display effect (for example, the approaching display effect of FIG. 42(6)), and the specific effect (for example, FIG. 43(8)) can be performed. In the case where it is better not to perform the specific effect than to perform the SP ready-to-win effect), the display effect (for example, the approaching display effect of FIG. It is characterized by being easy to perform.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to perform an effect that makes the player pay attention to the winning pattern depending on whether or not to perform a specific effect, so that the effect using the decorative pattern is interesting. can be improved.

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 100) includes a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining a game state triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and an effect according to the determination by the determination means. Effect control means (e.g., effect control unit 300) that controls the first mode (e.g., low probability time-saving non-game state) and second mode (e.g., high probability time-saving game state) controllable game control means (for example, a game control unit 200), and the production control means performs a pattern display production for controlling the display of a plurality of patterns (for example, three decorative patterns 41) on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition. , in the variable display for varying the plurality of symbols, some of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) are displayed, and the other symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbols 41) are varied. It is possible to perform a continuous predetermined effect (for example, ready-to-win effect), and when performing the predetermined effect, a specific identification element (for example, FIG. 36 (B-5)) that identifies the pattern among the partial patterns 411) can be enlarged, and when performing the predetermined effect, the first mode (for example, FIGS. 35 (A-1) to (A-4), FIG. 36 (A-5) to (A-8), and low probability time-saving no-game state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 37 (A-9) to (A-11) is performed) than the second mode (for example, FIG. B-1) to (B-4), FIGS. 36(B-5) to (B-8), and FIGS. 37(B-9) to (B-12). It is characterized in that it is easier to enlarge and display the specific identification element after the start of the predetermined effect in the probability time-saving game state.
By adopting such a configuration, the effect of making the player pay attention to the effect image other than the specific identification element in the pattern and the effect of impressing the player as to which pattern is aligned to perform the predetermined effect can be realized in the game state. Since it can be switched according to the situation, it is possible to improve the interest in the performance using the decorative pattern.

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern includes an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative effect (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. and a first display mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 58 (1)), and a second display mode (for example, FIG. 62-1 (1 ) and a decorative pattern 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)) and a second mode (for example, FIG. 64 (1) Decorative pattern 41), and when using the first mode, the time to arrange and display a plurality of the production patterns in a visually recognizable manner than when using the second mode is long.
In addition, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) is provided with acquisition means (for example, random number acquiring section 231) for acquiring determination information when the starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Determining means (for example, special design determination unit 234) for determining whether or not, and when notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the production design, production control to display a plurality of the production designs in a visible manner. means (for example, production control unit 300), and the production pattern includes an identification character (for example, number element 411) and a decorativeness (for example, character element) corresponding to the identification character when starting the variable display 413) and a first display mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 58 (1)), and a second display mode (for example, FIG. 62-1 (1) decorative pattern 41), and the second display mode is a first mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)) and a second mode in which the arrangement of each pattern is different from each other (For example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 64 (1)), and when using the first mode, a plurality of the production patterns can be visually recognized than when using the second mode. It is characterized in that the time for aligning and displaying (for example, the time for temporary stop) is long.

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect control means can execute a special effect (for example, a reach fan effect) that incites whether the effect pattern will be a reach. A first display mode (for example, the decoration in FIG. 58(1)) having an identification character (for example, number element 411) and a decorative property (for example, character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when starting the variable display pattern 41), and a second display mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is mutually It has a first mode (eg, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second mode (eg, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) having different display modes, and uses the first mode The ratio of executing the special effect is different between the variable effect and the variable effect using the second mode, and the probability of performing the special game in the variation in which the effect symbol executes the ready-to-win after the special effect is executed is the above. The variation performance using the second mode is higher than the variation performance using the first mode.
In addition, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) is provided with acquisition means (for example, random number acquiring section 231) for acquiring determination information when the starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Determining means (for example, special design determination unit 234) for determining whether or not, and when notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the production design, production control to display a plurality of the production designs in a visible manner. Means (for example, production control unit 300), the production control means is capable of executing a special production (for example, ready-to-win production) for inciting whether or not the production pattern becomes a reach, and the production pattern is a first display mode (e.g., FIG. 58 (1) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is , having a first mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) in which the arrangement of each pattern is different from each other, The variable performance using the first mode and the variable performance using the second mode differ in the ratio of executing the special performance, and the special game in the variation in which the performance symbol executes the reach after the special performance is executed. It is characterized in that the probability of execution is higher in the variable performance using the second mode than in the variable performance using the first mode.

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined change effect (for example, a reach time pattern effect) when the effect pattern becomes a reach, and the effect pattern is , a first display mode (for example, the a decorative pattern 41), and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61(1)) mainly composed of the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode is It has a first mode (eg, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second mode (eg, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) that are different from each other in display mode, and the first display mode is characterized in that it is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than in the second mode.
In addition, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) is provided with acquisition means (for example, random number acquiring section 231) for acquiring determination information when the starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Determining means (for example, special design determination unit 234) for determining whether or not, and when notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the production design, production control to display a plurality of the production designs in a visible manner. means (for example, production control unit 300), and the production control means is capable of executing a predetermined change production (for example, ready-to-win time pattern production) when the production pattern becomes ready-to-win, and the production The pattern is a first display mode (for example, FIG. 58 (1 ) and a second display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 61 (1)) mainly composed of the identification characters when the variable display is started, and the second display mode has a first mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 65-1 (1)) and a second mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 61 (1)) in which the arrangement of each pattern is different from each other, The first display mode is characterized in that it is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than the second mode.

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, the production control unit 300), and the production pattern is an identification character ( For example, a first display mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 58(1)) having a number element 411) and a decoration corresponding to the identification character (for example, a character element 413), and the variable display is started. Sometimes it has a second display mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 62-1 (1)) mainly composed of the identification characters, and when the second display mode is used and when the first display mode is used The time for arranging and displaying the plurality of performance symbols in a visually recognizable manner is different depending on the case.

◇ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect pattern includes an identification character (for example, a number element 411) and a decorative effect (for example, a character element 413) corresponding to the identification character when the variable display is started. and a first display mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 67 (1)), and a second display mode (for example, in FIG. 68-2 (10 ), and when the variable production using the first mode is started, a suggestive production that suggests that the variable production using the first mode is started (for example, the introduction image 94 and display of variable probability mode end image 99) can be executed, and the suggestive effect when switching from the variable effect using the first display mode to the variable effect using the first mode (for example, the display of the introduction image 94) is higher than the suggestive effect (for example, the display of the probability variable mode end image 99) when switching from the variable effect using the second mode to the variable effect using the first mode. .
In addition, this gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) is provided with acquisition means (for example, random number acquiring section 231) for acquiring determination information when the starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Determining means (for example, special design determination unit 234) for determining whether or not, and when notifying the result of the determination by variably displaying the production design, production control to display a plurality of the production designs in a visible manner. means (for example, production control unit 300), and the production pattern includes an identification character (for example, number element 411) and a decorativeness (for example, character element) corresponding to the identification character when starting the variable display 413) and a first display mode (for example, decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 67(1)) and a second display mode (for example, FIG. 67(6 ), and the second display mode includes the first mode (for example, the decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 68-2 (10) decorative pattern 41), and when the variable production using the first mode is started, a suggestive production that suggests that the variable production using the first mode is started ( For example, the display of the introduction image 94 and the probability variable mode end image 99) can be executed, and the suggestive effect when switching from the variation effect using the first display mode to the variation effect using the first mode (for example, the introduction image 94 display) is higher than the suggestive effect (for example, the display of the probability variable mode end image 99) when switching from the variable effect using the second mode to the variable effect using the first mode. It is characterized by

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect control means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, reach fan effect) that incites whether or not the effect pattern becomes a reach, and a first game state ( For example, a low probability time-saving non-game state) and a second game state (for example, a high probability time-saving game state), which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, The ratio of executing the special effect is different, and the probability of performing the special game in the change in which the performance pattern executes the ready-to-win after the execution of the special performance is higher in the second game state than in the first game state.

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes acquisition means (for example, a random number acquisition unit 231) for acquiring determination information when a starting condition is established, and whether or not to perform a special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (for example, special symbol determination unit 234) to determine, and production control means ( For example, an effect control unit 300), and the effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined change effect (for example, a reach time pattern effect) when the effect pattern becomes a reach, and the effect pattern is , As a display mode displayed in the same gaming state (for example, low-probability time-saving non-gaming state), when the variable display is started, an identification character (for example, a numerical element 411) and a decoration corresponding to the identification character ( For example, a first display mode (for example, a decorative pattern 41 in FIG. 59-1 (1)) having a character element 413), and a second display mode mainly composed of the identification characters when starting the variable display ( For example, it has a decorative pattern 41) of FIG. 61 (1), and when using the first display mode, it is easier to execute the predetermined change effect than when using the second display mode. characterized by

41 ... Decorative pattern (an example of a pattern)
100 Pachinko game machine (an example of a game machine)
114: Image display unit (an example of display means)
200... Game control unit (an example of game control means)
231 Random number acquisition unit (an example of acquisition means)
233... Special symbol variation control section (an example of symbol control means)
234... Special symbol determination unit (an example of determination means)
300 ... Production control unit (an example of production control means)
310... Image/sound control section (an example of production control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling game effects based on commands from the main control means,
An image display means for updating a display image each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached,
The main control means is
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on determination information acquired by establishment of a starting condition;
a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as pending storage;
A game control means capable of controlling a first mode and a second mode;
A variation control means for variably displaying the pattern and then stopping the display based on the result of the determination,
The production control means is
It is possible to display a number of icons corresponding to the number of pending memories,
It is possible to execute a change effect in which the icon is displayed in a special mode that suggests the possibility that the special game different from the normal mode will be executed,
In the change production,
a first change effect executed at a frame update timing corresponding to reception of a command transmitted from the main control means based on the fact that the starting condition is met and the determination information is acquired;
a second change effect executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command transmitted from the main control means based on the determination,
It is possible to execute a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols are varied and then displayed on the display means,
It is possible to execute a ready-to-win effect in which some of the plurality of symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols continue to fluctuate,
When performing the ready-to-win effect, it is possible to enlarge and display a specific identification element that identifies the pattern among the part of the patterns,
When performing the ready-to-win effect, it is easier to enlarge and display the specific identification element after the start of the ready-to-win effect in the second mode than in the first mode,
When performing the ready-to-win effect in the first mode, it is possible to enlarge and display the specific identification element after starting the ready-to-win effect,
A predetermined notification sound can be output when the icon is increased and displayed,
When the icon is increased by one during the customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed, the output period of the predetermined notification sound is longer than the increased display period of the icon,
When the first change effect is executed, the output of the predetermined notification sound is started at the timing when the first change effect is started, and the predetermined notification sound is output at a timing different from the timing when the first change effect is finished. A gaming machine characterized by ending the output of a notification sound.

Images